Commit bf531a3a730e2da8ea3d1a83ad0c13fd1aa3118c

Authored by Dominik Adamski
0 parents

Added IEEE template

IEEEtran.cls 0 → 100644
  1 +++ a/IEEEtran.cls
  1 +%%
  2 +%% IEEEtran.cls 2015/08/26 version V1.8b
  3 +%%
  4 +%% This is the IEEEtran LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of
  5 +%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
  6 +%% conferences.
  7 +%%
  8 +%% Support sites:
  9 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
  10 +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran
  11 +%% and
  12 +%% http://www.ieee.org/
  13 +%%
  14 +%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
  15 +%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
  16 +%%
  17 +%%
  18 +%% Contributors:
  19 +%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
  20 +%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
  21 +%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2014)
  22 +%%
  23 +%%
  24 +%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi,
  25 +%% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
  26 +%% Juergen von Hagen
  27 +%% and
  28 +%% Copyright (c) 2001-2015 by Michael Shell
  29 +%%
  30 +%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8b): Michael Shell
  31 +%% See:
  32 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
  33 +%% for current contact information.
  34 +%%
  35 +%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
  36 +%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command
  37 +%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package.
  38 +%%
  39 +%%*************************************************************************
  40 +%% Legal Notice:
  41 +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
  42 +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
  43 +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
  44 +%% User assumes all risk.
  45 +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
  46 +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
  47 +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
  48 +%% of any information contained here.
  49 +%%
  50 +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
  51 +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
  52 +%%
  53 +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
  54 +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
  55 +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
  56 +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
  57 +%% 2003/12/01 or later.
  58 +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
  59 +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
  60 +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
  61 +%%
  62 +%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
  63 +%% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
  64 +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
  65 +%%
  66 +%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an
  67 +%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will
  68 +%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
  69 +%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
  70 +%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
  71 +%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
  72 +%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
  73 +%% correct version information.
  74 +%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
  75 +%%*************************************************************************
  76 +%%
  77 +%
  78 +% Available class options
  79 +% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran}
  80 +%
  81 +% *** choose only one from each category ***
  82 +%
  83 +% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
  84 +% Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
  85 +%
  86 +% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
  87 +% determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
  88 +% correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
  89 +% should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
  90 +% journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
  91 +% anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
  92 +% repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
  93 +% papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
  94 +% automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
  95 +% cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
  96 +% not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
  97 +% peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
  98 +% as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
  99 +% information can be easily seen on the cover page.
  100 +% The default is journal.
  101 +%
  102 +% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
  103 +% determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
  104 +% handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
  105 +% draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
  106 +% packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
  107 +% for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
  108 +% draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
  109 +% of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
  110 +% also want to select onecolumn.
  111 +% The default is final.
  112 +%
  113 +% letterpaper, a4paper, cspaper
  114 +% determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in, 210mm X 297mm or 7.875in X 10.75in.
  115 +% Changing the paper size in the standard journal and conference modes
  116 +% will not alter the typesetting of the document - only the margins will
  117 +% be affected. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
  118 +% have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
  119 +% bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
  120 +% margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
  121 +% For the compsoc conference and draft modes, it is the margins that will
  122 +% remain constant, and thus the text area size will vary, with changes in
  123 +% the paper size.
  124 +% The cspaper option is the special ``trim'' paper size (7.875in x 10.75in)
  125 +% used in the actual publication of Computer Society journals. Under
  126 +% compsoc journal mode, this option does not alter the typesetting of the
  127 +% document. Authors should invoke the cspaper option only if requested to
  128 +% do so by the editors of the specific journal they are submitting to.
  129 +% For final submission to the IEEE, authors should generally use US letter
  130 +% (8.5 X 11in) paper unless otherwise instructed. Note that authors should
  131 +% ensure that all post-processing (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper
  132 +% specificiation as the .tex document. Problems here are by far the number
  133 +% one reason for incorrect margins. IEEEtran will automatically set the
  134 +% default paper size under pdflatex (without requiring any change to
  135 +% pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more important to dvips users. Fix
  136 +% config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for dvips, or use the
  137 +% dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. For the cspaper option,
  138 +% the corresponding dvips paper name is "ieeecs".
  139 +% See the testflow documentation
  140 +% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
  141 +% for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
  142 +% The default is letterpaper.
  143 +%
  144 +% oneside, twoside
  145 +% determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
  146 +% printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
  147 +% the pages.
  148 +% The default is oneside.
  149 +%
  150 +% onecolumn, twocolumn
  151 +% determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
  152 +% column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
  153 +% The default is twocolumn.
  154 +%
  155 +% comsoc, compsoc, transmag
  156 +% Use the format of the IEEE Communications Society, IEEE Computer Society
  157 +% or IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, respectively.
  158 +%
  159 +% romanappendices
  160 +% Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
  161 +% now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
  162 +% v1.6b and earlier did.
  163 +%
  164 +% captionsoff
  165 +% disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
  166 +% request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
  167 +% of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
  168 +% package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
  169 +%
  170 +% nofonttune
  171 +% turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
  172 +% not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
  173 +% their fonts.
  174 +% The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
  175 +%
  176 +%
  177 +%----------
  178 +% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
  179 +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
  180 +% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
  181 +% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
  182 +% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
  183 +% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
  184 +%
  185 +% Available CLASSINFOs provided:
  186 +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional)
  187 +% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro)
  188 +% \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro)
  189 +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length)
  190 +% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
  191 +%
  192 +% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
  193 +% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
  194 +% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
  195 +% point size options provided as a single macro:
  196 +% \CLASSOPTIONpt
  197 +% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
  198 +% normalsize point size.
  199 +% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
  200 +% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
  201 +
  202 +
  203 +
  204 +
  205 +
  206 +\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2015/08/26 V1.8b by Michael Shell]
  207 +\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
  208 +\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
  209 +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
  210 +
  211 +% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
  212 +% These values serve as a way a .tex file can
  213 +% determine if the new features are provided.
  214 +% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from
  215 +% these values. i.e., V1.4
  216 +% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
  217 +% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
  218 +\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
  219 +\def\IEEEtransversionminor{8}
  220 +
  221 +
  222 +% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
  223 +\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
  224 +
  225 +
  226 +% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
  227 +\newif\if@restonecol
  228 +\newif\if@titlepage
  229 +
  230 +
  231 +% class option conditionals
  232 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
  233 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
  234 +
  235 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
  236 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
  237 +
  238 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
  239 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
  240 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
  241 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
  242 +
  243 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
  244 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
  245 +
  246 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
  247 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
  248 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
  249 +
  250 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
  251 +
  252 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
  253 +
  254 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc \CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse
  255 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
  256 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag \CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse
  257 +
  258 +\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
  259 +
  260 +
  261 +% class info conditionals
  262 +
  263 +% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
  264 +\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse
  265 +
  266 +
  267 +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
  268 +\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
  269 +% V1.6b internal flag to show if using cspaper
  270 +\newif\if@IEEEusingcspaper \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
  271 +
  272 +
  273 +% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
  274 +% dimen
  275 +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  276 +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  277 +\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  278 +% count
  279 +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
  280 +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
  281 +\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC
  282 +% token list
  283 +\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
  284 +
  285 +% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
  286 +% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
  287 +% external packages
  288 +\def\@ptsize{0}
  289 +% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
  290 +\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
  291 +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
  292 +\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
  293 +\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
  294 +
  295 +
  296 +
  297 +\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
  298 + \setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
  299 + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
  300 + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
  301 + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
  302 + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
  303 + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
  304 +
  305 +
  306 +\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
  307 + \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
  308 + \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
  309 + \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
  310 + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
  311 + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
  312 + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
  313 +
  314 +% special paper option for compsoc journals
  315 +\DeclareOption{cspaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{7.875in}%
  316 + \setlength{\paperheight}{10.75in}%
  317 + \@IEEEusingcspapertrue
  318 + \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
  319 + \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{ieeecs}%
  320 + \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{7.875in}%
  321 + \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}}
  322 +
  323 +\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
  324 + \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
  325 +\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
  326 + \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
  327 +
  328 +\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
  329 +\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
  330 +
  331 +% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
  332 +% will go into draft mode.
  333 +\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
  334 + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
  335 +% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
  336 +% used by the document.
  337 +\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
  338 + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
  339 +% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
  340 +\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
  341 + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue}
  342 +\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
  343 + \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
  344 +
  345 +\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
  346 + \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
  347 +
  348 +\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
  349 + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
  350 +
  351 +\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
  352 + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
  353 +
  354 +\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
  355 + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
  356 +
  357 +\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
  358 + \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
  359 +
  360 +\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
  361 +
  362 +\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
  363 +
  364 +\DeclareOption{comsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse}
  365 +
  366 +\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse}
  367 +
  368 +\DeclareOption{transmag}{\CLASSOPTIONtransmagtrue\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse}
  369 +
  370 +\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
  371 +
  372 +
  373 +% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
  374 +\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
  375 +% overrride these defaults per user requests
  376 +\ProcessOptions
  377 +
  378 +
  379 +
  380 +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
  381 +
  382 +% Sets the category codes for punctuation to their normal values.
  383 +% For local use with argument scanning.
  384 +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct{\catcode`\!=12 \catcode`\,=12 \catcode`\:=12
  385 +\catcode`\;=12 \catcode`\`=12 \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\.=12
  386 +\catcode`\/=12 \catcode`\?=12 \catcode`\*=12 \catcode`\+=12 \catcode`\-=12
  387 +\catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \catcode`\(=12 \catcode`\)=12 \catcode`\[=12
  388 +\catcode`\]=12 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\|=12}
  389 +% Sets the category codes for numbers to their normal values.
  390 +% For local use with argument scanning.
  391 +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum{\catcode`\0=12 \catcode`\1=12 \catcode`\2=12
  392 +\catcode`\3=12 \catcode`\4=12 \catcode`\5=12 \catcode`\6=12 \catcode`\7=12
  393 +\catcode`\8=12 \catcode`\9=12}
  394 +% combined action of \IEEEnormalcatcodespunct and \IEEEnormalcatcodesnum
  395 +\def\IEEEnormalcatcodes{\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum}
  396 +
  397 +
  398 +% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{}
  399 +% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
  400 +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first
  401 +% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let
  402 +% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro
  403 +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
  404 +% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded,
  405 +% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to
  406 +% be preserved.
  407 +% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or
  408 +% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and
  409 +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty.
  410 +%
  411 +% For example:
  412 +% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
  413 +% results in:
  414 +%
  415 +% \@IEEEextracttokenarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
  416 +% \@IEEEextractedtoken ==> the letter a
  417 +% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro ==> a macro containing a
  418 +% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g
  419 +%
  420 +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument
  421 +% contents during processing.
  422 +\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}}
  423 +
  424 +\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax
  425 +\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty
  426 +% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument
  427 +% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument
  428 +% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true.
  429 +\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg
  430 +\loop
  431 + % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with
  432 + % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition
  433 + \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty
  434 + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax
  435 + \else
  436 + \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax
  437 + \fi
  438 + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup
  439 + \else
  440 + \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
  441 +\repeat
  442 +% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token
  443 +% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found
  444 +\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax}
  445 +
  446 +\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax
  447 +\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
  448 +\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
  449 +{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}}
  450 +%%
  451 +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
  452 +
  453 +
  454 +
  455 +% Computer Society conditional execution command
  456 +\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
  457 +% inverse
  458 +\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
  459 +% compsoc conference
  460 +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
  461 +% compsoc not conference
  462 +\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
  463 +
  464 +
  465 +% comsoc verify that newtxmath, mtpro2, mt11p or mathtime has been loaded
  466 +\def\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\typeout{-- Verifying Times compatible math font.}\relax
  467 + \@ifpackageloaded{newtxmath}{\typeout{-- newtxmath loaded, OK.}}{\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
  468 +\def\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mtpro2}{\typeout{-- mtpro2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
  469 +\def\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mt11p}{\typeout{-- mt11p2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
  470 +\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mathtime}{\typeout{-- mathtime loaded, OK.}}{\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
  471 +
  472 +% comsoc, if a Times math font was not loaded by user, enforce it
  473 +\def\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** Times compatible math font not found, forcing.}\relax
  474 +\IfFileExists{newtxmath.sty}{\typeout{-- Found newtxmath, loading.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}{\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
  475 +\def\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mtpro2.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mtpro2, loading.}\RequirePackage{mtpro2}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
  476 +\def\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mt11p.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mt11p, loading.}\RequirePackage{mt11p}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
  477 +\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mathtime.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mathtime, loading.}\RequirePackage{mathtime}}{\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
  478 +% if no acceptable Times math font package found, error with newtxmath requirement
  479 +\def\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** No Times compatible math font package found. newtxmath is required.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}
  480 +
  481 +
  482 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc
  483 + % ensure that if newtxmath is used, the cmintegrals option is also invoked
  484 + \PassOptionsToPackage{cmintegrals}{newtxmath}
  485 + % comsoc requires a Times like math font
  486 + % ensure this requirement is satisfied at document start
  487 + \AtBeginDocument{\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}
  488 +\fi
  489 +
  490 +
  491 +
  492 +% The IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
  493 +% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
  494 +\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
  495 +\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
  496 +\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
  497 +
  498 +% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
  499 +% not Times Roman.
  500 +\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
  501 +
  502 +% enable the selected main text font
  503 +\normalfont\selectfont
  504 +
  505 +
  506 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc
  507 + \typeout{-- Using IEEE Communications Society mode.}
  508 +\fi
  509 +
  510 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  511 + \typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}
  512 +\fi
  513 +
  514 +
  515 +% V1.7 conference notice message hook
  516 +\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
  517 +\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
  518 +\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
  519 +\typeout{}%
  520 +\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
  521 +\typeout{ of your paper;}%
  522 +\typeout{}%
  523 +\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
  524 +\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
  525 +\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
  526 +\typeout{}}
  527 +
  528 +
  529 +% we can send console reminder messages to the user here
  530 +\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
  531 +
  532 +
  533 +% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
  534 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
  535 + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
  536 + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
  537 + \fi%
  538 +\fi
  539 +
  540 +
  541 +% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
  542 +% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
  543 +% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
  544 +% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
  545 +% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
  546 +{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
  547 +% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
  548 +% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
  549 +% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
  550 +\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
  551 +\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
  552 +% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
  553 +\ifcase\pdfoutput
  554 +\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
  555 +\else
  556 +% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
  557 +\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
  558 +\fi}}
  559 +
  560 +% let the user know the selected papersize
  561 +\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
  562 +(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
  563 +
  564 +\ifCLASSINFOpdf
  565 +\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
  566 +\else
  567 +\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
  568 +\fi
  569 +
  570 +
  571 +% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
  572 +% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
  573 +% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
  574 +% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
  575 +% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
  576 +% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
  577 +% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
  578 +%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
  579 +%\def\@journal{}
  580 +
  581 +
  582 +
  583 +% pointsize values
  584 +% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
  585 +\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
  586 +\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
  587 +\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
  588 +\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
  589 +
  590 +
  591 +
  592 +% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed)
  593 +% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
  594 +% revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
  595 +% on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
  596 +% normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading)
  597 +% 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down)
  598 +% 10pt 58 12pt (exact)
  599 +% 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down)
  600 +% 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact)
  601 +%
  602 +
  603 +% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
  604 +% in case baselinestretch ever changes.
  605 +% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
  606 +\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
  607 +\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
  608 +
  609 +
  610 +
  611 +%% ******* WARNING! *******
  612 +%%
  613 +%% Authors should not alter font sizes, baselineskip ("leading"),
  614 +%% margins or other spacing values in an attempt to squeeze more
  615 +%% material on each page.
  616 +%%
  617 +%% The IEEE's own typesetting software will restore the correct
  618 +%% values when re-typesetting/proofing the submitted document,
  619 +%% possibly resulting in unexpected article over length charges.
  620 +%%
  621 +%% ******* WARNING! *******
  622 +
  623 +
  624 +% 9pt option defaults
  625 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
  626 +\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
  627 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}
  628 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}
  629 +\normalsize
  630 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
  631 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  632 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 3pt
  633 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
  634 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
  635 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
  636 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
  637 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
  638 +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
  639 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
  640 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
  641 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
  642 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
  643 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
  644 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
  645 +\fi
  646 +%
  647 +% 10pt option defaults
  648 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
  649 +\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
  650 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}
  651 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}
  652 +\normalsize
  653 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
  654 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  655 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4pt
  656 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
  657 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
  658 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
  659 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
  660 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
  661 +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
  662 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
  663 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
  664 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
  665 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
  666 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
  667 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
  668 +\fi
  669 +%
  670 +% 11pt option defaults
  671 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
  672 +\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
  673 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}
  674 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}
  675 +\normalsize
  676 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
  677 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  678 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5pt
  679 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
  680 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
  681 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
  682 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
  683 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
  684 +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
  685 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
  686 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
  687 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
  688 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
  689 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
  690 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
  691 +\fi
  692 +%
  693 +% 12pt option defaults
  694 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
  695 +\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
  696 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}
  697 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}
  698 +\normalsize
  699 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
  700 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  701 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6pt
  702 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
  703 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
  704 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
  705 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
  706 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
  707 +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
  708 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
  709 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
  710 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
  711 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
  712 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
  713 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
  714 +\fi
  715 +
  716 +
  717 +
  718 +% V1.8a compsoc font sizes
  719 +% compsoc font sizes use bp "Postscript" point units (1/72in)
  720 +% rather than the traditional pt (1/72.27)
  721 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  722 +% -- compsoc defaults --
  723 +% ** will override some of these values later **
  724 +% 9pt
  725 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
  726 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{11bp}}
  727 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11bp}
  728 +\normalsize
  729 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
  730 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  731 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
  732 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
  733 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5bp}{10bp}}
  734 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
  735 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
  736 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
  737 +% sublargesize is the same as large - 10bp
  738 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10bp}{12bp}}
  739 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10bp}{12bp}}
  740 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12bp}{14bp}}
  741 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14bp}{17bp}}
  742 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17bp}{20bp}}
  743 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
  744 +\fi
  745 +%
  746 +% 10pt
  747 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
  748 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}}
  749 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12bp}
  750 +\normalsize
  751 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
  752 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  753 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
  754 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
  755 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9bp}{10bp}}
  756 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
  757 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
  758 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
  759 +% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11bp
  760 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
  761 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
  762 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
  763 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
  764 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
  765 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
  766 +\fi
  767 +%
  768 +% 11pt
  769 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
  770 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
  771 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.5bp}
  772 +\normalsize
  773 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
  774 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  775 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
  776 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
  777 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
  778 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
  779 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
  780 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
  781 +% sublargesize is the same as large - 12bp
  782 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12bp}{14bp}}
  783 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
  784 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
  785 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
  786 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
  787 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
  788 +\fi
  789 +%
  790 +% 12pt
  791 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
  792 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14bp}}%
  793 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14bp}%
  794 +\normalsize
  795 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
  796 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  797 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
  798 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
  799 +\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
  800 +\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
  801 +\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
  802 +\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
  803 +% sublargesize is the same as large - 14bp
  804 +\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14bp}{17bp}}
  805 +\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14bp}{17bp}}
  806 +\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17bp}{20bp}}
  807 +\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20bp}{24bp}}
  808 +\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22bp}{26bp}}
  809 +\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
  810 +\fi
  811 +%
  812 +% -- override defaults: compsoc journals use special normalsizes --
  813 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  814 +%
  815 +% compsoc conferences
  816 +% 9pt
  817 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
  818 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
  819 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
  820 +\normalsize
  821 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
  822 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  823 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
  824 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
  825 +\fi
  826 +% 10pt
  827 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
  828 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{11.2bp}}
  829 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.2bp}
  830 +\normalsize
  831 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
  832 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  833 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
  834 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
  835 +\fi
  836 +% 11pt
  837 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
  838 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
  839 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
  840 +\normalsize
  841 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
  842 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  843 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
  844 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
  845 +\fi
  846 +% 12pt
  847 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
  848 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
  849 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
  850 +\normalsize
  851 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
  852 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  853 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
  854 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
  855 +\fi
  856 +%
  857 +% compsoc nonconferences
  858 +\else
  859 +% 9pt
  860 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
  861 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
  862 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
  863 +\normalsize
  864 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
  865 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  866 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
  867 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
  868 +\fi
  869 +% 10pt
  870 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
  871 +% the official spec is 9.5bp with 11.4bp leading for 10pt,
  872 +% but measurements of proofs suggest upto 11.723bp leading
  873 +% here we'll use 11.54bp which gives 61 lines per column
  874 +% with the standard compsoc margins
  875 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9.5bp}{11.54bp}}
  876 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.54bp}
  877 +\normalsize
  878 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
  879 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  880 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
  881 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
  882 +\fi
  883 +% 11pt
  884 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
  885 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
  886 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
  887 +\normalsize
  888 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
  889 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  890 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
  891 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
  892 +\fi
  893 +% 12pt
  894 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
  895 +\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
  896 +\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
  897 +\normalsize
  898 +\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
  899 +\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  900 +\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
  901 +\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
  902 +\fi
  903 +\fi\fi
  904 +
  905 +
  906 +
  907 +
  908 +% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
  909 +% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead, but the default and correct
  910 +% Times font will scale exactly as needed) increase the substitution
  911 +% tolerance to turn off this warning.
  912 +%
  913 +% V1.8a, the compsoc bp font sizes can also cause bogus font substitution
  914 +% warnings with footnote or scriptsize math and the $\bullet$ itemized
  915 +% list of \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks. So, increase this to 1.5pt or more.
  916 +\def\fontsubfuzz{1.7bp}
  917 +
  918 +
  919 +% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
  920 +% technote
  921 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
  922 + \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
  923 + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
  924 + \fi%
  925 +\fi
  926 +
  927 +
  928 +% V1.7
  929 +% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
  930 +% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
  931 +% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
  932 +\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
  933 +\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
  934 +\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
  935 +\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
  936 +\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
  937 +\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
  938 +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
  939 +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
  940 +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
  941 +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
  942 +\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
  943 +\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
  944 +
  945 +
  946 +
  947 +
  948 +% set the default \baselinestretch
  949 +\def\baselinestretch{1}
  950 +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  951 + \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
  952 +\fi
  953 +
  954 +
  955 +% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
  956 +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
  957 +\else
  958 + \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
  959 + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
  960 + \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
  961 +\fi
  962 +
  963 +\small\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
  964 +
  965 +
  966 +
  967 +
  968 +% store the normalsize baselineskip
  969 +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
  970 +\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
  971 +% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
  972 +% we could save a register by giving the user access to
  973 +% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
  974 +% its read only internal status
  975 +\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
  976 +\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
  977 +% store the nominal value of jot
  978 +\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
  979 +\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
  980 +
  981 +% set \jot
  982 +\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
  983 +
  984 +
  985 +
  986 +
  987 +% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
  988 +% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
  989 +% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
  990 +% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
  991 +% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
  992 +%
  993 +% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
  994 +%
  995 +% However, the IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
  996 +% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, the IEEE
  997 +% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
  998 +% The IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
  999 +% 35% nominal
  1000 +% 23% minimum
  1001 +% 50% maximum
  1002 +% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
  1003 +%
  1004 +% for bold text, the IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
  1005 +% 37.5% nominal
  1006 +% 23% minimum
  1007 +% 55% maximum
  1008 +
  1009 +% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
  1010 +% for medium (normal weight)
  1011 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
  1012 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
  1013 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
  1014 +
  1015 +% for bold
  1016 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
  1017 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
  1018 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
  1019 +
  1020 +
  1021 +% compsoc nonconference papers use Palatino,
  1022 +% tweak settings to better match the proofs
  1023 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  1024 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
  1025 +% for medium (normal weight)
  1026 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.28}
  1027 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.21}
  1028 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.47}
  1029 +% for bold
  1030 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.305}
  1031 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.21}
  1032 +\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.52}
  1033 +\fi\fi
  1034 +
  1035 +
  1036 +% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
  1037 +% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
  1038 +% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
  1039 +% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
  1040 +% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
  1041 +% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
  1042 +\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
  1043 +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
  1044 +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
  1045 +\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1046 +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
  1047 +\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1048 +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
  1049 +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
  1050 +\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
  1051 +
  1052 +% revise the interword spacing for each font weight
  1053 +\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
  1054 +\mdseries
  1055 +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
  1056 +\bfseries
  1057 +\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
  1058 +}}
  1059 +
  1060 +% revise the interword spacing for each font shape
  1061 +% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
  1062 +% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what the IEEE uses) so we
  1063 +% won't alter these either.
  1064 +\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
  1065 +\normalfont
  1066 +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1067 +\normalfont\itshape
  1068 +\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1069 +}}
  1070 +
  1071 +% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
  1072 +% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a
  1073 +% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
  1074 +\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
  1075 +\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1076 +\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1077 +\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1078 +\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1079 +\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1080 +\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1081 +\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1082 +\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1083 +\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
  1084 +\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
  1085 +
  1086 +% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
  1087 +% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
  1088 +% sure all the default fonts are loaded
  1089 +\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
  1090 +\@IEEEtunefonts
  1091 +\fi
  1092 +
  1093 +% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
  1094 +\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
  1095 +
  1096 +
  1097 +
  1098 +
  1099 +
  1100 +% -- V1.8a page setup commands --
  1101 +
  1102 +% The default sample text for calculating margins
  1103 +% Note that IEEE publications use \scriptsize for headers and footers.
  1104 +\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT}
  1105 +\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize T}% IEEE headers default to uppercase
  1106 +\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize gT}
  1107 +
  1108 +
  1109 +
  1110 +% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin}
  1111 +% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins
  1112 +% for the current \paperwidth.
  1113 +\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth
  1114 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax
  1115 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1116 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax
  1117 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1118 +\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
  1119 +
  1120 +
  1121 +
  1122 +% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset}
  1123 +% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin
  1124 +% of the given mode.
  1125 +% The available modes are:
  1126 +% i = inner margin
  1127 +% o = outer margin
  1128 +% c = centered, with the given offset
  1129 +% a = adjust the margins using the given offset
  1130 +% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin.
  1131 +% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this
  1132 +% function.
  1133 +\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
  1134 +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
  1135 +% check for mode errors
  1136 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  1137 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1138 + Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax
  1139 + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax
  1140 + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax
  1141 +\else
  1142 + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  1143 + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  1144 + \fi
  1145 +\fi
  1146 +% handle each mode
  1147 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  1148 + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1149 +\else
  1150 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  1151 + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
  1152 + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
  1153 + \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax
  1154 + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
  1155 + \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1156 +\else
  1157 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax
  1158 + \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
  1159 + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
  1160 + \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1161 + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
  1162 +\else
  1163 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
  1164 + \else
  1165 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1166 + Defaulting to `i'}%
  1167 + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}%
  1168 + \fi
  1169 + \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1170 + \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
  1171 +\fi\fi\fi
  1172 +% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages
  1173 +\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
  1174 +% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect
  1175 +\if@twoside
  1176 + \evensidemargin\paperwidth
  1177 + \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth
  1178 + \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin
  1179 + % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset
  1180 + % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin
  1181 + \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax
  1182 +\fi}
  1183 +
  1184 +
  1185 +
  1186 +% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin}
  1187 +% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin.
  1188 +% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the
  1189 +% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
  1190 +\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
  1191 +\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax
  1192 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
  1193 + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin
  1194 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
  1195 + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin
  1196 + \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip
  1197 + % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines
  1198 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1199 + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1200 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1201 + \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
  1202 +
  1203 +
  1204 +
  1205 +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength
  1206 +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
  1207 +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
  1208 +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax
  1209 +\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0}
  1210 +
  1211 +% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length}
  1212 +% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given
  1213 +% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given
  1214 +% length.
  1215 +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the
  1216 +% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length.
  1217 +% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units
  1218 +% in \IEEEquantizedlength.
  1219 +% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength = \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit
  1220 +% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized:
  1221 +% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint)
  1222 +% c = use the closest match
  1223 +% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint)
  1224 +% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized,
  1225 +% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero.
  1226 +\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup
  1227 +% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp
  1228 +% variables
  1229 +% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
  1230 +% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength,
  1231 +% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters,
  1232 +% i.e., in sp units
  1233 +% A has the base unit
  1234 +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax
  1235 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
  1236 +% B has the input length
  1237 +\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax
  1238 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
  1239 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
  1240 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
  1241 +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int
  1242 +% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length
  1243 +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff
  1244 +% initialize them to zero as this is what will be
  1245 +% exported if an error occurs
  1246 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax
  1247 +\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
  1248 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax
  1249 +% extract mode
  1250 +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
  1251 +% check for mode errors
  1252 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  1253 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1254 + Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax
  1255 + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax
  1256 + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax
  1257 +\else
  1258 + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  1259 + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  1260 + \fi
  1261 +\fi
  1262 +% check for base unit is zero error
  1263 +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax
  1264 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1265 + \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax
  1266 +\else% base unit is nonzero
  1267 + % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units
  1268 + % in the quantized length (integer length \ base)
  1269 + \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax
  1270 + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax
  1271 + % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length
  1272 + % = base * int
  1273 + \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1274 + \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax
  1275 + % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference
  1276 + % = quantized length - length
  1277 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
  1278 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  1279 + % trap special case of length being already quantized
  1280 + % to avoid a roundup under i option
  1281 + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax
  1282 + \else % length not is already quantized
  1283 + % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference:
  1284 + % quantizedlength + base - length
  1285 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax
  1286 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  1287 + % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference:
  1288 + % length - quantizedlength
  1289 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
  1290 + % handle each mode
  1291 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  1292 + % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper
  1293 + \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1294 + % use upper
  1295 + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
  1296 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
  1297 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1298 + \else% <=. uselower
  1299 + % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup
  1300 + \fi
  1301 + \else% not mode c
  1302 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
  1303 + % always round up under i mode
  1304 + \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
  1305 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
  1306 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1307 + \else
  1308 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax
  1309 + \else
  1310 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1311 + Defaulting to `d'}%
  1312 + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax
  1313 + \fi % if d
  1314 + % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup
  1315 + \fi\fi % if i, c
  1316 + \fi % if length is already quantized
  1317 +\fi% if base unit is zero
  1318 +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
  1319 +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
  1320 +% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int
  1321 +% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length
  1322 +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff
  1323 +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
  1324 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
  1325 +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
  1326 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax
  1327 +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
  1328 +\endgroup
  1329 +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
  1330 +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax
  1331 +\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax
  1332 +\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax}
  1333 +
  1334 +
  1335 +
  1336 +\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff
  1337 +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax
  1338 +
  1339 +% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i}
  1340 +% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip
  1341 +% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line.
  1342 +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between
  1343 +% the new quantized and original \textheight.
  1344 +% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of
  1345 +% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e.,
  1346 +% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip
  1347 +% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized:
  1348 +% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column)
  1349 +% c = use the closest match
  1350 +% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column)
  1351 +% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged,
  1352 +% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero.
  1353 +% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength
  1354 +\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}}
  1355 +\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup
  1356 +% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad
  1357 +% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization
  1358 +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight
  1359 +\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax
  1360 +\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff}
  1361 +% add back \topskip line
  1362 +\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip
  1363 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax
  1364 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
  1365 +% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
  1366 +% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
  1367 +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
  1368 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
  1369 +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
  1370 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax
  1371 +\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
  1372 +\endgroup
  1373 +% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
  1374 +\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax
  1375 +\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax
  1376 +\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}}
  1377 +
  1378 +
  1379 +
  1380 +% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset}
  1381 +% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin.
  1382 +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep,
  1383 +% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth)
  1384 +% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
  1385 +% The available modes are:
  1386 +% t = top margin
  1387 +% b = bottom margin
  1388 +% c = vertically centered, with the given offset
  1389 +% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset
  1390 +% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset
  1391 +% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin.
  1392 +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the
  1393 +% given margins before calling this function.
  1394 +\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
  1395 +\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
  1396 +\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
  1397 +% check for mode errors
  1398 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  1399 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1400 + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
  1401 + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
  1402 + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
  1403 +\else
  1404 + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  1405 + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  1406 + \fi
  1407 +\fi
  1408 +% handle each mode
  1409 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  1410 + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1411 +\else
  1412 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax
  1413 + % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value
  1414 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax
  1415 + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
  1416 + % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin
  1417 + % because \textheight has been lenghtened
  1418 + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  1419 + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1420 +\else
  1421 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  1422 + \topmargin\paperheight
  1423 + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
  1424 + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
  1425 + \advance \topmargin by \topskip
  1426 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1427 + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  1428 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1429 + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  1430 + \divide\topmargin by 2\relax
  1431 + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1432 +\else
  1433 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
  1434 + \topmargin\paperheight
  1435 + \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
  1436 + % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
  1437 + \advance \topmargin by \topskip
  1438 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1439 + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  1440 + \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1441 +\else
  1442 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
  1443 + \else
  1444 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1445 + Defaulting to `t'}%
  1446 + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
  1447 + \fi
  1448 + \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1449 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1450 + \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  1451 +\fi\fi % if t, b, c
  1452 +% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin
  1453 +% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments
  1454 +\advance \topmargin by -\topskip
  1455 +\advance \topmargin by -1in
  1456 +\advance \topmargin by -\headheight
  1457 +\advance \topmargin by -\headsep
  1458 +\fi\fi % if q, a
  1459 +}
  1460 +
  1461 +
  1462 +
  1463 +% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
  1464 +% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged)
  1465 +% based on the specified header margin.
  1466 +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default)
  1467 +% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and
  1468 +% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
  1469 +% The available modes are:
  1470 +% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page)
  1471 +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text)
  1472 +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page,
  1473 +% with the given offset
  1474 +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
  1475 +% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward.
  1476 +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before
  1477 +% calling this function.
  1478 +\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}}
  1479 +\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
  1480 +\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
  1481 +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
  1482 +% check for mode errors
  1483 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  1484 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1485 + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
  1486 + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
  1487 + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
  1488 +\else
  1489 + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  1490 + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  1491 + \fi
  1492 +\fi
  1493 +% handle each mode
  1494 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  1495 + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
  1496 + % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will
  1497 + % do all that is needed
  1498 +\else
  1499 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  1500 + % get the bottom margin
  1501 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  1502 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1503 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1504 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
  1505 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1506 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1507 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
  1508 + % subtract from it the top header margin
  1509 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
  1510 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin
  1511 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight
  1512 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1513 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1514 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins
  1515 + % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header
  1516 + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
  1517 + % and add to offset
  1518 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1519 +\else
  1520 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
  1521 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  1522 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1523 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1524 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
  1525 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1526 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1527 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
  1528 + % get the difference between the actual and the desired
  1529 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1530 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1531 +\else
  1532 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
  1533 + \else
  1534 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1535 + Defaulting to `t'}%
  1536 + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
  1537 + \fi
  1538 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
  1539 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin
  1540 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight
  1541 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1542 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1543 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin
  1544 + % get the difference between the desired and the actual
  1545 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1546 +\fi\fi % if t, b, c
  1547 +\fi % if a
  1548 +% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same
  1549 +% so as not to disturb the location of the main text
  1550 +\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1551 +\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1552 +}
  1553 +
  1554 +
  1555 +
  1556 +% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
  1557 +% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin.
  1558 +% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight,
  1559 +% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the
  1560 +% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
  1561 +% The available modes are:
  1562 +% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text)
  1563 +% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page)
  1564 +% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page,
  1565 +% with the given offset
  1566 +% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
  1567 +% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward.
  1568 +% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set
  1569 +% properly before calling this function.
  1570 +\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}}
  1571 +\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
  1572 +\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
  1573 +\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
  1574 +% check for mode errors
  1575 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  1576 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1577 + Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
  1578 + \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
  1579 + \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
  1580 +\else
  1581 + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  1582 + \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  1583 + \fi
  1584 +\fi
  1585 +% handle each mode
  1586 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  1587 + % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
  1588 + % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that
  1589 + % is needed
  1590 +\else
  1591 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  1592 + % calculate the bottom margin
  1593 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
  1594 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
  1595 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
  1596 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  1597 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
  1598 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
  1599 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1600 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1601 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
  1602 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1603 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
  1604 + % now subtract off the footer top margin
  1605 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax
  1606 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1607 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1608 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1609 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1610 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom
  1611 + % and top footer margins
  1612 + % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer
  1613 + \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
  1614 + % add to the offset
  1615 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1616 +\else
  1617 +\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
  1618 + % calculate the bottom margin
  1619 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
  1620 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
  1621 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
  1622 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  1623 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
  1624 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
  1625 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1626 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1627 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
  1628 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1629 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
  1630 + % get the difference between the actual and the desired
  1631 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1632 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1633 +\else
  1634 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
  1635 + \else
  1636 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  1637 + Defaulting to `t'}%
  1638 + {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
  1639 + \fi
  1640 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
  1641 + \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1642 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1643 + \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  1644 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  1645 + % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin
  1646 + % get the difference between the desired and the actual
  1647 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  1648 +\fi\fi % if t, b, c
  1649 +\fi % if a
  1650 +% advance \footskip by the needed amount
  1651 +\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  1652 +}
  1653 +
  1654 +% -- End V1.8a page setup commands --
  1655 +
  1656 +
  1657 +
  1658 +
  1659 +
  1660 +% V1.6
  1661 +% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
  1662 +% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
  1663 +% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
  1664 +% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
  1665 +% but the appearance will be much better "right out
  1666 +% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
  1667 +% TeX default is 50
  1668 +\hyphenpenalty=750
  1669 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  1670 +\hyphenpenalty 500
  1671 +\fi
  1672 +% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
  1673 +% The TeX default is 1000
  1674 +\hbadness=1350
  1675 +% The IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
  1676 +\frenchspacing
  1677 +
  1678 +% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
  1679 +\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
  1680 +\relpenalty=800 % default 500
  1681 +
  1682 +% v1.8a increase these to discourage widows and orphans
  1683 +\clubpenalty=1000 % default 150
  1684 +\widowpenalty=1000 % default 150
  1685 +\displaywidowpenalty=1000 % default 50
  1686 +
  1687 +
  1688 +% margin note stuff
  1689 +\marginparsep 10pt
  1690 +\marginparwidth 20pt
  1691 +\marginparpush 25pt
  1692 +
  1693 +
  1694 +% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
  1695 +\lineskip 0pt
  1696 +\normallineskip 0pt
  1697 +\lineskiplimit 0pt
  1698 +\normallineskiplimit 0pt
  1699 +
  1700 +% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
  1701 +% footline
  1702 +\footskip 0.4in
  1703 +
  1704 +% normally zero, should be relative to font height.
  1705 +% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
  1706 +\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
  1707 +
  1708 +\parindent 1.0em
  1709 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  1710 + \parindent 1.5em
  1711 +\fi
  1712 +
  1713 +\headheight 12pt
  1714 +\headsep 18pt
  1715 +% use the normal font baselineskip
  1716 +% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
  1717 +\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
  1718 +
  1719 +
  1720 +% V1.8 \maxdepth defaults to 4pt, but should be font size dependent
  1721 +\maxdepth=0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
  1722 +\textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt
  1723 +
  1724 +% set the default top margin to 58pt
  1725 +% which results in a \topmargin of -49.59pt for 10pt documents
  1726 +\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{58pt}
  1727 +% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/column.
  1728 +% standard is: 9pt/63 lpc; 10pt/58 lpc; 11pt/52 lpc; 12pt/50 lpc
  1729 +\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
  1730 +% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
  1731 +\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
  1732 +
  1733 +
  1734 +\columnsep 1pc
  1735 +\textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
  1736 +
  1737 +% set the default side margins to center the text
  1738 +\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
  1739 +
  1740 +
  1741 +% adjust margins for default conference mode
  1742 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  1743 + \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
  1744 + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.75in}
  1745 + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
  1746 + % standard is: 9pt/61 lpc; 10pt/56 lpc; 11pt/50 lpc; 12pt/48 lpc
  1747 + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
  1748 + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
  1749 + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
  1750 +\fi
  1751 +
  1752 +
  1753 +% compsoc text sizes, margins and spacings
  1754 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  1755 + \columnsep 12bp
  1756 + % CS specs for \textwdith are 6.875in
  1757 + % \textwidth 6.875in
  1758 + % however, measurements from proofs show they are using 3.5in columns
  1759 + \textwidth 7in
  1760 + \advance\textwidth by \columnsep
  1761 + % set the side margins to center the text
  1762 + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
  1763 + % top/bottom margins to center
  1764 + % could just set \textheight to 9.75in for all the different paper sizes
  1765 + % and then quantize, but we'll do it the long way here to allow for easy
  1766 + % future per-paper size adjustments
  1767 + \IEEEsettextheight{0.625in}{0.625in}% 11in - 2 * 0.625in = 9.75in is the standard text height for compsoc journals
  1768 + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.625in}
  1769 + \if@IEEEusingcspaper
  1770 + \IEEEsettextheight{0.5in}{0.5in}% 10.75in - 2 * 0.5in = 9.75in
  1771 + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.5in}
  1772 + \fi
  1773 + \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
  1774 + \IEEEsettextheight{24.675mm}{24.675mm}% 297mm - 2 * 24.675mm = 247.650mm (9.75in)
  1775 + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{24.675mm}
  1776 + \fi
  1777 + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
  1778 + % standard is: 9pt/65 lpc; 10pt/61 lpc; 11pt/53 lpc; 12pt/49 lpc
  1779 + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
  1780 + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
  1781 + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
  1782 +
  1783 +% compsoc conference
  1784 + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  1785 + % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
  1786 + \columnsep 0.25in
  1787 + \IEEEsettextwidth{0.75in}{0.75in}
  1788 + % set the side margins to center the text (0.75in for letterpaper)
  1789 + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
  1790 + % compsoc conferences want 1in top and bottom margin
  1791 + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
  1792 + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
  1793 + % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
  1794 + % standard is: 9pt/58 lpc; 10pt/53 lpc; 11pt/48 lpc; 12pt/46 lpc
  1795 + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
  1796 + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
  1797 + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
  1798 + \fi
  1799 +\fi
  1800 +
  1801 +
  1802 +
  1803 +% draft mode settings override that of all other modes
  1804 +% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
  1805 +% space between the lines for editor's comments
  1806 +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  1807 + % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
  1808 + \IEEEsettextwidth{1in}{1in}
  1809 + \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
  1810 + % want 1in top and bottom margins
  1811 + \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
  1812 + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
  1813 + % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
  1814 + % this may cause the top and bottom margins to be off a tad
  1815 + \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
  1816 + % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
  1817 + \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
  1818 +\fi
  1819 +
  1820 +
  1821 +
  1822 +% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
  1823 +% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
  1824 +\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
  1825 +\else
  1826 + \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
  1827 + \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
  1828 + \fi
  1829 +\fi
  1830 +
  1831 +\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
  1832 +\else
  1833 + % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
  1834 + \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
  1835 + \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
  1836 + \fi
  1837 + \IEEEsettextwidth{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
  1838 + \IEEEsetsidemargin{i}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
  1839 + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and
  1840 + outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
  1841 +\fi
  1842 +
  1843 +
  1844 +
  1845 +% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
  1846 +% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
  1847 +\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
  1848 +\else
  1849 + \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
  1850 + \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
  1851 + \fi
  1852 +\fi
  1853 +
  1854 +\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
  1855 +\else
  1856 + % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
  1857 + \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
  1858 + \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
  1859 + \fi
  1860 + \IEEEsettextheight{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
  1861 + \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
  1862 + \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and
  1863 + bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
  1864 +\fi
  1865 +
  1866 +
  1867 +
  1868 +% default to center header and footer text in the margins
  1869 +\IEEEsetheadermargin{c}{0pt}
  1870 +\IEEEsetfootermargin{c}{0pt}
  1871 +
  1872 +% adjust header and footer positions for compsoc journals
  1873 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  1874 + \ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
  1875 + \IEEEsetheadermargin{b}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
  1876 + \IEEEsetfootermargin{t}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
  1877 + \fi
  1878 +\fi
  1879 +
  1880 +
  1881 +% V1.8a display lines per column info message on user's console
  1882 +\def\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\textheight
  1883 +% topskip represents only one line even if > baselineskip
  1884 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -1\topskip
  1885 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1886 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  1887 +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
  1888 +% need to add one line to include topskip (first) line
  1889 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 1
  1890 +% save lines per column value as text
  1891 +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB}
  1892 +% backout topskip advance to allow direct \@IEEEtrantmpcountA comparison
  1893 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by -1
  1894 +% restore value as text height (without topskip) rather than just as number of lines
  1895 +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
  1896 +% is the column height an integer number of lines per column?
  1897 +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
  1898 +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{exact}
  1899 +\else
  1900 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
  1901 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
  1902 +\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{approximate, difference = \the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
  1903 +\fi
  1904 +\typeout{-- Lines per column: \@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt\space (\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt).}}
  1905 +% delay execution till start of document to allow for user changes
  1906 +\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn}
  1907 +
  1908 +
  1909 +
  1910 +% LIST SPACING CONTROLS
  1911 +
  1912 +% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
  1913 +% above and below \trivlist
  1914 +% Both \list and IED lists override this.
  1915 +% However, \trivlist will use this as will most
  1916 +% things built from \trivlist like the \center
  1917 +% environment.
  1918 +\topsep 0.5\baselineskip
  1919 +
  1920 +% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
  1921 +% or followed by blank lines. the IEEE does not increase
  1922 +% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
  1923 +% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
  1924 +\partopsep \z@
  1925 +
  1926 +% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists.
  1927 +% The IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
  1928 +% so this is also zero.
  1929 +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
  1930 +% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
  1931 +\parsep \z@
  1932 +
  1933 +% Controls the extra spacing between list items.
  1934 +% The IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
  1935 +% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
  1936 +% lists (but not IED lists).
  1937 +\itemsep \z@
  1938 +
  1939 +% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
  1940 +% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
  1941 +% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
  1942 +% However, the IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
  1943 +% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
  1944 +\itemindent -1em
  1945 +
  1946 +% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
  1947 +% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
  1948 +% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
  1949 +% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
  1950 +\leftmargin 2em
  1951 +
  1952 +% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
  1953 +% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
  1954 +% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
  1955 +% all are overridden.
  1956 +\leftmargini 2em
  1957 +%\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used.
  1958 +%\leftmargini 0em
  1959 +\leftmarginii 1em
  1960 +\leftmarginiii 1.5em
  1961 +\leftmarginiv 1.5em
  1962 +\leftmarginv 1.0em
  1963 +\leftmarginvi 1.0em
  1964 +\labelsep 0.5em
  1965 +\labelwidth \z@
  1966 +
  1967 +
  1968 +% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
  1969 +% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
  1970 +% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
  1971 +% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called).
  1972 +% \topsep is now 2pt as the IEEE puts a little extra space around
  1973 +% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
  1974 +% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in
  1975 +% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
  1976 +% of these values DO affect \list
  1977 +%
  1978 +\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
  1979 +\let\@listI\@listi
  1980 +\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
  1981 + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
  1982 +\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
  1983 + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
  1984 +\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
  1985 + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
  1986 +\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
  1987 + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
  1988 +\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
  1989 + \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
  1990 +
  1991 +
  1992 +% The IEEE uses 5) not 5.
  1993 +\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
  1994 +
  1995 +% The IEEE uses a) not (a)
  1996 +\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
  1997 +
  1998 +% The IEEE uses iii) not iii.
  1999 +\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
  2000 +
  2001 +% The IEEE uses A) not A.
  2002 +\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
  2003 +
  2004 +% exactly the same as in article.cls
  2005 +\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
  2006 +\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
  2007 +\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
  2008 +
  2009 +% itemized list label styles
  2010 +\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
  2011 +\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
  2012 +\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
  2013 +\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
  2014 +
  2015 +
  2016 +
  2017 +% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
  2018 +% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
  2019 +% ***************************
  2020 +%
  2021 +%
  2022 +% The IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
  2023 +% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
  2024 +% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
  2025 +% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
  2026 +% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
  2027 +% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
  2028 +% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose
  2029 +% which one you like in your document using a command such as:
  2030 +% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
  2031 +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
  2032 +\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
  2033 +
  2034 +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
  2035 +\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
  2036 +% However, we'll default to using \parindent
  2037 +% which makes more sense to me
  2038 +\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
  2039 +\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
  2040 +
  2041 +
  2042 +% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
  2043 +% are indented to the right.
  2044 +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
  2045 +\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
  2046 +\IEEEelabelindent \parindent
  2047 +
  2048 +% This controls the default amount the description list labels
  2049 +% are indented to the right.
  2050 +% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
  2051 +\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
  2052 +\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
  2053 +
  2054 +% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
  2055 +% The IED environments automatically set its value to
  2056 +% one of the three values above, so global changes do
  2057 +% not have any effect
  2058 +\newdimen\IEEElabelindent
  2059 +\IEEElabelindent \parindent
  2060 +
  2061 +% The actual amount labels will be indented is
  2062 +% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
  2063 +% corresponding to the level of nesting depth
  2064 +% This provides a means by which the user can
  2065 +% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
  2066 +% levels
  2067 +% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
  2068 +% values. What the IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
  2069 +% circumstances.
  2070 +% The first list level almost always has full indention.
  2071 +% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
  2072 +% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
  2073 +% that they don't use any indentation.
  2074 +\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one
  2075 +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
  2076 +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
  2077 +\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
  2078 +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
  2079 +\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
  2080 +
  2081 +% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
  2082 +% set to one of the 6 values above
  2083 +% global changes here have no effect
  2084 +\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
  2085 +
  2086 +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
  2087 +% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
  2088 +% the labels.
  2089 +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
  2090 +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
  2091 +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
  2092 +\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
  2093 +\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
  2094 +
  2095 +% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
  2096 +% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
  2097 +% the labels (nomenclature lists). The IEEE usually increases the
  2098 +% spacing in these cases
  2099 +\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
  2100 +\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
  2101 +
  2102 +% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
  2103 +% below each IED list. the IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
  2104 +% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
  2105 +% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
  2106 +% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
  2107 +% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
  2108 +\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
  2109 +\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
  2110 +
  2111 +
  2112 +% This command is executed within each IED list environment
  2113 +% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the
  2114 +% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing
  2115 +% global parameters that affect things other than lists.
  2116 +% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
  2117 +% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until
  2118 +% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined.
  2119 +\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
  2120 +
  2121 +% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
  2122 +% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
  2123 +% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
  2124 +% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
  2125 +% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
  2126 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
  2127 +\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
  2128 +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
  2129 +\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
  2130 +
  2131 +% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
  2132 +% width of the given text. It is the same as
  2133 +% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
  2134 +% and useful as a shorter alternative.
  2135 +% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
  2136 +% of the longest label in the list
  2137 +\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
  2138 +
  2139 +% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the
  2140 +% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
  2141 +% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
  2142 +% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
  2143 +% environments.
  2144 +\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
  2145 +
  2146 +% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
  2147 +% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
  2148 +% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
  2149 +% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse)
  2150 +% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
  2151 +% environments to have an effect.
  2152 +\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
  2153 +\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
  2154 +
  2155 +% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
  2156 +% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
  2157 +% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option
  2158 +% of the IED list environments to have an effect.
  2159 +\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
  2160 +\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
  2161 +
  2162 +
  2163 +% internal variable to indicate type of IED label
  2164 +% justification
  2165 +% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
  2166 +\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
  2167 +
  2168 +
  2169 +% commands to allow the user to control IED
  2170 +% label justifications. Use these commands within
  2171 +% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
  2172 +% Note that changing the normal list justifications
  2173 +% is nonstandard and the IEEE may not like it if you do so!
  2174 +% I include these commands as they may be helpful to
  2175 +% those who are using these enhanced list controls for
  2176 +% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
  2177 +% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
  2178 +% justification, description defaults to left.
  2179 +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
  2180 +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
  2181 +\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
  2182 +
  2183 +
  2184 +
  2185 +
  2186 +% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
  2187 +% this allows us to set all the list parameters within
  2188 +% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list)
  2189 +% from overriding any of our parameters
  2190 +% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
  2191 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
  2192 +\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
  2193 +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
  2194 +\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
  2195 +\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
  2196 +\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
  2197 +\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
  2198 +\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
  2199 +\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
  2200 +\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
  2201 +\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
  2202 +
  2203 +% Note controlled spacing here
  2204 +\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
  2205 +\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
  2206 +\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
  2207 +\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
  2208 +\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
  2209 +\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
  2210 +\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
  2211 +\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
  2212 +\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
  2213 +\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
  2214 +
  2215 +
  2216 +% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
  2217 +% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
  2218 +% which must be created by the base classes
  2219 +% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
  2220 +\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
  2221 +\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
  2222 +\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
  2223 +\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
  2224 +
  2225 +% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
  2226 +\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
  2227 + {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
  2228 + \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
  2229 + {\endlist}
  2230 +\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
  2231 + \normalfont\bfseries #1}
  2232 +
  2233 +
  2234 +% override LaTeX's default IED lists
  2235 +\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
  2236 +\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
  2237 +\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
  2238 +\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
  2239 +\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
  2240 +\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
  2241 +
  2242 +% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
  2243 +% override itemize, enumerate, or description
  2244 +\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
  2245 +\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
  2246 +\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
  2247 +\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
  2248 +\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
  2249 +\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
  2250 +
  2251 +
  2252 +% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
  2253 +% commands so they are protected against redefinition
  2254 +\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
  2255 +\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
  2256 +\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
  2257 +\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
  2258 +\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
  2259 +\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
  2260 +
  2261 +
  2262 +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
  2263 +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
  2264 +% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
  2265 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
  2266 +\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
  2267 + \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
  2268 + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
  2269 + \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
  2270 + \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
  2271 + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
  2272 + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
  2273 + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
  2274 + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
  2275 + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
  2276 + % set other defaults
  2277 + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
  2278 + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
  2279 + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
  2280 + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
  2281 + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
  2282 + \partopsep 0ex%
  2283 + \parsep 0ex%
  2284 + \itemsep 0ex%
  2285 + \rightmargin 0em%
  2286 + \listparindent 0em%
  2287 + \itemindent 0em%
  2288 + % calculate the label width
  2289 + % the user can override this later if
  2290 + % they specified a \labelwidth
  2291 + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
  2292 + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
  2293 + \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
  2294 + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
  2295 + % to our globals
  2296 + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
  2297 + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
  2298 + #1\relax%
  2299 + % If the user has requested not to use the
  2300 + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
  2301 + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
  2302 + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
  2303 + \fi%
  2304 + % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
  2305 + % calculate our left margin based
  2306 + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
  2307 + % \labelsep
  2308 + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
  2309 + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
  2310 + \fi}\fi\fi}%
  2311 +
  2312 +
  2313 +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
  2314 +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
  2315 +% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
  2316 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
  2317 +\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
  2318 + \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
  2319 + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
  2320 + \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
  2321 + \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
  2322 + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
  2323 + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
  2324 + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
  2325 + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
  2326 + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
  2327 + % set other defaults
  2328 + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
  2329 + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
  2330 + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
  2331 + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
  2332 + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
  2333 + \partopsep 0ex%
  2334 + \parsep 0ex%
  2335 + \itemsep 0ex%
  2336 + \rightmargin 0em%
  2337 + \listparindent 0em%
  2338 + \itemindent 0em%
  2339 + % calculate the label width
  2340 + % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
  2341 + % normalfont 1) to 9)
  2342 + % The user can override this later
  2343 + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
  2344 + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
  2345 + \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
  2346 + \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
  2347 + % to our globals
  2348 + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
  2349 + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
  2350 + #1\relax%
  2351 + % If the user has requested not to use the
  2352 + % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
  2353 + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
  2354 + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
  2355 + \fi%
  2356 + % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
  2357 + % calculate our left margin based
  2358 + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
  2359 + % \labelsep
  2360 + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
  2361 + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
  2362 + \fi}\fi\fi}%
  2363 +
  2364 +
  2365 +% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
  2366 +% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
  2367 +% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
  2368 +% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
  2369 +\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
  2370 + \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
  2371 + % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
  2372 + \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
  2373 + \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
  2374 + \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
  2375 + \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
  2376 + % set other defaults
  2377 + \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
  2378 + \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
  2379 + \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
  2380 + \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
  2381 + % assume normal labelsep
  2382 + \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
  2383 + \partopsep 0ex%
  2384 + \parsep 0ex%
  2385 + \itemsep 0ex%
  2386 + \rightmargin 0em%
  2387 + \listparindent 0em%
  2388 + \itemindent 0em%
  2389 + % Bogus label width in case the user forgets
  2390 + % to set it.
  2391 + % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
  2392 + % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to
  2393 + % display it on the screen during compilation
  2394 + % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
  2395 + % which label is the widest)
  2396 + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
  2397 + \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
  2398 + \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
  2399 + % to our globals
  2400 + \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
  2401 + \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
  2402 + #1\relax%
  2403 + % If the user has requested not to use the
  2404 + % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
  2405 + \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
  2406 + \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
  2407 + \fi%
  2408 + % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
  2409 + % calculate our left margin based
  2410 + % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
  2411 + % \labelsep
  2412 + \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
  2413 + \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
  2414 + \fi}\fi}
  2415 +
  2416 +% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
  2417 +\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
  2418 +\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
  2419 +\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
  2420 +\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
  2421 +\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
  2422 +
  2423 +
  2424 +% compsoc uses a larger value for the normal labelsep
  2425 +% and also extra spacing above and below each list
  2426 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  2427 + \IEEEiednormlabelsep 1.2em
  2428 + \IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt
  2429 +\fi
  2430 +
  2431 +
  2432 +% VERSE and QUOTE
  2433 +% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
  2434 +\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
  2435 + \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
  2436 + \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
  2437 + {\endlist}
  2438 +\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
  2439 + \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
  2440 + {\endlist}
  2441 +\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
  2442 + {\endlist}
  2443 +
  2444 +
  2445 +% \titlepage
  2446 +% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
  2447 +% way to create the title page.
  2448 +\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
  2449 + \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
  2450 +\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
  2451 +
  2452 +% standard values from article.cls
  2453 +\arraycolsep 5pt
  2454 +\arrayrulewidth .4pt
  2455 +\doublerulesep 2pt
  2456 +
  2457 +\tabcolsep 6pt
  2458 +\tabbingsep 0.5em
  2459 +
  2460 +
  2461 +%% FOOTNOTES
  2462 +%
  2463 +%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
  2464 +% V1.6 respond to changes in font size
  2465 +% space added above the footnotes (if present)
  2466 +\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
  2467 +
  2468 +% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
  2469 +% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
  2470 +% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
  2471 +% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
  2472 +% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
  2473 +% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7\baselineskip
  2474 +% above the baseline and 0.3\baselineskip below it, we need to
  2475 +% use 0.7\baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
  2476 +% between all the lines of the footnotes. The IEEE often uses a tad
  2477 +% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
  2478 +% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
  2479 +% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
  2480 +{\footnotesize
  2481 +\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
  2482 +
  2483 +
  2484 +\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
  2485 +\fboxsep = 3pt
  2486 +\fboxrule = .4pt
  2487 +% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
  2488 +% Note that the IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
  2489 +% box resizing tricks here.
  2490 +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
  2491 +% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
  2492 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  2493 +\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
  2494 +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
  2495 +\fi
  2496 +
  2497 +% The IEEE does not use footnote rules
  2498 +\def\footnoterule{}
  2499 +
  2500 +% V1.7 for compsoc, the IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
  2501 +% system to implement this.
  2502 +\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
  2503 +\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
  2504 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  2505 +\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
  2506 +\kern-5pt
  2507 +\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
  2508 +\kern4.6pt
  2509 +\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
  2510 +\else
  2511 +\relax
  2512 +\fi}
  2513 +\fi
  2514 +
  2515 +% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
  2516 +\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
  2517 +
  2518 +% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
  2519 +% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
  2520 +% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
  2521 +\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
  2522 +
  2523 +% default allows section depth up to /paragraph
  2524 +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
  2525 +
  2526 +% technotes do not allow /paragraph
  2527 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
  2528 + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
  2529 +\fi
  2530 +% neither do compsoc conferences
  2531 +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
  2532 +
  2533 +
  2534 +\newcounter{section}
  2535 +\newcounter{subsection}[section]
  2536 +\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
  2537 +\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
  2538 +
  2539 +% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
  2540 +% have their own, different, implementations
  2541 +\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
  2542 +
  2543 +% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
  2544 +\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1
  2545 +\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
  2546 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  2547 +% compsoc is all arabic
  2548 +\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}
  2549 +\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
  2550 +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
  2551 +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
  2552 +\else
  2553 +\def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I
  2554 +% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around -
  2555 +\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A
  2556 +% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by the IEEE rather than I-A.1
  2557 +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1
  2558 +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a
  2559 +\fi
  2560 +
  2561 +% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
  2562 +% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
  2563 +% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
  2564 +% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
  2565 +\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
  2566 +\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
  2567 +
  2568 +
  2569 +% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
  2570 +% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
  2571 +% in the former to automatically appear in the latter
  2572 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  2573 + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
  2574 + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
  2575 + \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
  2576 + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
  2577 + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
  2578 + \else% compsoc not conferencs
  2579 + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
  2580 + \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
  2581 + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
  2582 + \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
  2583 + \fi
  2584 +\else% not compsoc
  2585 + \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I.
  2586 + \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B.
  2587 + \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3)
  2588 + \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d)
  2589 +\fi
  2590 +
  2591 +% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
  2592 +\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
  2593 +% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
  2594 +\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
  2595 +% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
  2596 +% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
  2597 +\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
  2598 +
  2599 +
  2600 +
  2601 +% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
  2602 +\def\contentsname{Contents}
  2603 +\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
  2604 +\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
  2605 +\def\refname{References}
  2606 +\def\indexname{Index}
  2607 +\def\figurename{Fig.}
  2608 +\def\tablename{TABLE}
  2609 +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}}
  2610 +\def\partname{Part}
  2611 +\def\appendixname{Appendix}
  2612 +\def\abstractname{Abstract}
  2613 +% IEEE specific names
  2614 +\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms}
  2615 +\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
  2616 +
  2617 +
  2618 +% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
  2619 +%
  2620 +\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
  2621 +\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
  2622 +\def\@dotsep{4.5}
  2623 +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
  2624 +
  2625 +% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily
  2626 +% collide with the section titles.
  2627 +% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
  2628 +% MDS 1/2001
  2629 +\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
  2630 +\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
  2631 + \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
  2632 + \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
  2633 + \endgroup}
  2634 +% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
  2635 +\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
  2636 +\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
  2637 +% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
  2638 +% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
  2639 +% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
  2640 +\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
  2641 +\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
  2642 +\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
  2643 +\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
  2644 +\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
  2645 +\let\l@table\l@figure
  2646 +
  2647 +
  2648 +% Definitions for floats
  2649 +%
  2650 +% Normal Floats
  2651 +% V1.8 floatsep et al. revised down by 0.15\baselineskip
  2652 +% to account for the sideeffects of \topskip compensation
  2653 +\floatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
  2654 +\textfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
  2655 +\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
  2656 +\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
  2657 +\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
  2658 +\def\topfraction{0.9}
  2659 +\def\bottomfraction{0.4}
  2660 +\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
  2661 +% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
  2662 +\def\textfraction{0.1}
  2663 +
  2664 +% Double Column Floats
  2665 +\dblfloatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
  2666 +
  2667 +\dbltextfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip
  2668 +% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
  2669 +% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
  2670 +% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
  2671 +% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
  2672 +% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
  2673 +% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
  2674 +% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
  2675 +% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
  2676 +% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
  2677 +
  2678 +\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
  2679 +\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
  2680 +\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
  2681 +\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
  2682 +\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
  2683 +\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
  2684 +
  2685 +\intextsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip
  2686 +\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
  2687 +\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
  2688 +\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
  2689 +
  2690 +
  2691 +
  2692 +% article class provides these, we should too.
  2693 +\newlength\abovecaptionskip
  2694 +\newlength\belowcaptionskip
  2695 +% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
  2696 +% captions
  2697 +\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
  2698 +% compsoc journals are a little more generous
  2699 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
  2700 + \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip}
  2701 +\fi\fi
  2702 +\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
  2703 +% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
  2704 +% overridden by a user
  2705 +\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
  2706 +\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
  2707 +
  2708 +
  2709 +% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
  2710 +% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
  2711 +\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
  2712 +
  2713 +
  2714 +% V1.8 compensate for \topskip so top of top figures align with tops of the first lines of main text
  2715 +% here we calculate a space equal to the amount \topskip exceeds the main text height
  2716 +% we hook in at \@floatboxreset
  2717 +\def\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\relax
  2718 +\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{1\topskip}\relax
  2719 +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-0.7\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\relax
  2720 +\vspace*{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\fi}
  2721 +% V1.8 compensate for \topskip at the top of top tables so caption text is on main text baseline
  2722 +% use a strut set on the caption baseline within \@makecaption
  2723 +\def\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\rule{0pt}{\topskip}\fi}
  2724 +% the \ifdim\prevdepth checks are always expected to be true for IEEE style float caption ordering
  2725 +% because top of figure content and top of captions in tables is the first thing on the vertical
  2726 +% list of these floats
  2727 +% thanks to Donald Arseneau for his 2000/11/11 post "Re: caption hacking" with info on this topic.
  2728 +
  2729 +
  2730 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  2731 +% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
  2732 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
  2733 +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
  2734 +% test if is a for a figure or table
  2735 +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
  2736 +% if a table, do table caption
  2737 +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
  2738 +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
  2739 +% if not a table, format it as a figure
  2740 +\else
  2741 +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
  2742 +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
  2743 +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
  2744 +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
  2745 +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
  2746 +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
  2747 +% if caption is shorter than a line, center
  2748 +\else%
  2749 +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
  2750 +\fi\fi}
  2751 +%
  2752 +\else% nonconference compsoc
  2753 +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
  2754 +% test if is a for a figure or table
  2755 +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
  2756 +% if a table, do table caption
  2757 +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
  2758 +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
  2759 +% if not a table, format it as a figure
  2760 +\else
  2761 +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
  2762 +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
  2763 +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
  2764 +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
  2765 +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
  2766 +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
  2767 +% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
  2768 +\else%
  2769 +\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
  2770 +\fi\fi}
  2771 +\fi
  2772 +%
  2773 +\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
  2774 +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
  2775 +% test if is a for a figure or table
  2776 +\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
  2777 +% if a table, do table caption
  2778 +\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
  2779 +\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
  2780 +% if not a table, format it as a figure
  2781 +\else
  2782 +\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
  2783 +% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
  2784 +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace #2}%
  2785 +\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
  2786 +% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
  2787 +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace}%
  2788 +\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
  2789 +% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
  2790 +\else%
  2791 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
  2792 +\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
  2793 +\fi\fi\fi}
  2794 +\fi
  2795 +
  2796 +
  2797 +
  2798 +% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
  2799 +% within \caption
  2800 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
  2801 +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering{\footnotesize #1}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
  2802 +\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
  2803 +\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
  2804 +\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
  2805 +\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
  2806 +\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
  2807 +\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
  2808 +\fi
  2809 +
  2810 +
  2811 +% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
  2812 +% preview-latex
  2813 +\newcounter{figure}
  2814 +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
  2815 +\def\fps@figure{tbp}
  2816 +\def\ftype@figure{1}
  2817 +\def\ext@figure{lof}
  2818 +\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure}
  2819 +% V1.8 within figures add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset
  2820 +\def\figure{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@float{figure}}
  2821 +\def\endfigure{\end@float}
  2822 +% V1.8 also add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to \figure*
  2823 +\@namedef{figure*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@dblfloat{figure}}
  2824 +\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
  2825 +
  2826 +\newcounter{table}
  2827 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  2828 +\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
  2829 +\else
  2830 +\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
  2831 +\fi
  2832 +\def\fps@table{tbp}
  2833 +\def\ftype@table{2}
  2834 +\def\ext@table{lot}
  2835 +\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable}
  2836 +% V1.6 The IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
  2837 +% within tables alter LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset to use \footnotesize
  2838 +\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
  2839 +\def\endtable{\end@float}
  2840 +% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
  2841 +\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
  2842 +\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
  2843 +
  2844 +
  2845 +
  2846 +
  2847 +%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
  2848 +%% V1.8a
  2849 +
  2850 +% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{}
  2851 +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores
  2852 +% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing
  2853 +% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro
  2854 +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces.
  2855 +%
  2856 +% For example:
  2857 +% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}}
  2858 +% results in:
  2859 +%
  2860 +% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}}
  2861 +% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c
  2862 +%
  2863 +% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument
  2864 +% contents during processing
  2865 +\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}}
  2866 +
  2867 +\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax
  2868 +% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited
  2869 +% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing
  2870 +% braces. Loop until this is true.
  2871 +\loop
  2872 + \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER
  2873 +\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg
  2874 +\else
  2875 + \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces
  2876 +\repeat}
  2877 +
  2878 +\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}}
  2879 +
  2880 +
  2881 +
  2882 +% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{}
  2883 +% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
  2884 +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group"
  2885 +% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup.
  2886 +% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro
  2887 +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite
  2888 +% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty.
  2889 +% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first
  2890 +% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer
  2891 +% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group.
  2892 +%
  2893 +% For example:
  2894 +% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}}
  2895 +% results in:
  2896 +%
  2897 +% \@IEEEextractgrouparg ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}}
  2898 +% \@IEEEextractedgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}
  2899 +% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain ==> a macro containing {c{de}}
  2900 +%
  2901 +% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument
  2902 +% contents during processing.
  2903 +\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}}
  2904 +
  2905 +\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax
  2906 +% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with
  2907 +% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition
  2908 +\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty
  2909 + \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax
  2910 + \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax
  2911 +\else
  2912 + % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around
  2913 + % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner
  2914 + % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an
  2915 + % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group.
  2916 + % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure
  2917 + % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow
  2918 + % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for
  2919 + % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it.
  2920 + \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax
  2921 +\fi}
  2922 +
  2923 +% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after
  2924 +% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the
  2925 +% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear
  2926 +% during run time.
  2927 +\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi}
  2928 +
  2929 +\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}}
  2930 +
  2931 +
  2932 +
  2933 +% \@IEEEextracttoken relocated at top because margin setting commands rely on it
  2934 +
  2935 +
  2936 +
  2937 +% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{}
  2938 +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores
  2939 +% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of
  2940 +% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro
  2941 +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup.
  2942 +% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token
  2943 +% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken
  2944 +% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first
  2945 +% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax
  2946 +% and empty, respectively. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
  2947 +% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in
  2948 +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace
  2949 +% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved.
  2950 +% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro
  2951 +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup.
  2952 +% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup,
  2953 +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken,
  2954 +% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and
  2955 +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded.
  2956 +% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces,
  2957 +% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will
  2958 +% be empty if none exist.
  2959 +%
  2960 +% For example:
  2961 +% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
  2962 +% will result in:
  2963 +%
  2964 +% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
  2965 +% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd}
  2966 +% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain ==> a macro containing {{ef}g}
  2967 +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken ==> the letter a
  2968 +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing a
  2969 +% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd
  2970 +% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ab
  2971 +% \@IEEEextractednextgroup ==> a macro containing {ef}g
  2972 +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken ==> the letter e
  2973 +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro ==> a macro containing e
  2974 +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg
  2975 +% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup ==> a macro containing ef
  2976 +%
  2977 +% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and
  2978 +% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax
  2979 +% and all the macros will be empty.
  2980 +% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument
  2981 +% contents during processing.
  2982 +%
  2983 +% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken
  2984 +\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}}
  2985 +\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax
  2986 +% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments
  2987 +% first group
  2988 +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax
  2989 +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
  2990 +\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain
  2991 +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
  2992 +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
  2993 +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
  2994 +\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
  2995 +% first first group
  2996 +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
  2997 +\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
  2998 +% next group
  2999 +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax
  3000 +\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
  3001 +\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
  3002 +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
  3003 +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
  3004 +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
  3005 +% next first group
  3006 +\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
  3007 +\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup}
  3008 +
  3009 +
  3010 +%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
  3011 +
  3012 +
  3013 +
  3014 +
  3015 +%%
  3016 +%% START OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS
  3017 +%%
  3018 +%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX
  3019 +%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett,
  3020 +%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum,
  3021 +%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
  3022 +%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
  3023 +
  3024 +
  3025 +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
  3026 +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse
  3027 +
  3028 +\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
  3029 +% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
  3030 +% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
  3031 +\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
  3032 +
  3033 +\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
  3034 +\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
  3035 +
  3036 +
  3037 +% The default math style used by the columns
  3038 +\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
  3039 +% The default text style used by the columns
  3040 +% default to using the current font
  3041 +\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
  3042 +
  3043 +% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
  3044 +\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
  3045 +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
  3046 +
  3047 +
  3048 +
  3049 +% V1.8 flags to indicate that equation numbering is to persist
  3050 +\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpersist%
  3051 +\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse
  3052 +\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist%
  3053 +\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse
  3054 +%
  3055 +% V1.8 flags to indicate if (sub)equation number of last line was preadvanced
  3056 +\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv%
  3057 +\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse
  3058 +\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv%
  3059 +\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse
  3060 +
  3061 +\newcount\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback% saves previous value of IEEEsubequation number in case we need to restore it
  3062 +
  3063 +% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
  3064 +% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
  3065 +% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as
  3066 +% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
  3067 +% This command is intended for use in non-IEEEeqnarray math environments
  3068 +\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
  3069 +
  3070 +
  3071 +% IEEEyes/nonumber
  3072 +% V1.8 add persistant * forms
  3073 +% These commands can alter the type of equation an IEEEeqnarray line is.
  3074 +\def\IEEEyesnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEyesnumber}{\@IEEEyesnumber}}
  3075 +
  3076 +\def\@IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue
  3077 +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
  3078 +\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax
  3079 + \stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
  3080 + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
  3081 +\fi
  3082 +% even if we reached this eqn num via a preadv, it is legit now
  3083 +\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse
  3084 +\fi}
  3085 +
  3086 +\def\IEEEnonumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\global\@eqnswfalse}{\global\@eqnswfalse}}
  3087 +
  3088 +
  3089 +\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEyessubnumber}{\@IEEEyessubnumber}}
  3090 +%
  3091 +\def\@IEEEyessubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
  3092 + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% if it already is a subequation, we are good to go as-is
  3093 + \else% if we are a regular equation we have to watch out for two cases
  3094 + \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv% if this equation is the result of a preadvance, backout and bump the sub eqnnum
  3095 + \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\addtocounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax
  3096 + \else% non-preadvanced equations just need initialization of their sub eqnnum
  3097 + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax
  3098 + \fi
  3099 + \fi% fi already is subequation
  3100 + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
  3101 + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
  3102 + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore
  3103 + \global\@eqnswtrue
  3104 +\fi}
  3105 +
  3106 +
  3107 +\def\IEEEnosubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEnosubnumber}{\@IEEEnosubnumber}}
  3108 +%
  3109 +\def\@IEEEnosubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
  3110 + \if@eqnsw % we do nothing unless we know we will display because we play with the counters here
  3111 + % if it currently is a subequation, bump up to the next equation number and turn off the subequation
  3112 + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\addtocounter{equation}{1}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax
  3113 + \fi
  3114 + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore
  3115 + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
  3116 + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
  3117 + \fi
  3118 +\fi}
  3119 +
  3120 +
  3121 +
  3122 +% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
  3123 +\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
  3124 +
  3125 +% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
  3126 +% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
  3127 +% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
  3128 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
  3129 +\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}\relax
  3130 +% check if column is defined for the precolumn definition
  3131 +% We have to be careful here because TeX scans for & even within an \iffalse
  3132 +% where it does not expand macros. So, if we used only one \ifx and a #3
  3133 +% appeared in the false branch and the user inserted another alignment
  3134 +% structure that uses & in the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{}, TeX will not see that
  3135 +% there is an inner alignment in the false branch yet still will see any &
  3136 +% there and will think that they apply to the outer alignment resulting in an
  3137 +% incomplete \ifx error.
  3138 +% So, here we use separate checks for the pre and post parts in order to keep
  3139 +% the #3 outside of all conditionals.
  3140 +\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax
  3141 +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname
  3142 +\else% if not, error and use default type
  3143 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
  3144 +Using a default centering column instead}%
  3145 +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
  3146 +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname
  3147 +\fi
  3148 +% The ten \relax are to help prevent misleading error messages in case a user
  3149 +% accidently inserted a macro that tries to acquire additional arguments.
  3150 +#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
  3151 +% check if column is defined for the postcolumn definition
  3152 +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax
  3153 +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname
  3154 +\else% if not, use the default type
  3155 +\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname
  3156 +\fi
  3157 +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
  3158 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
  3159 +
  3160 +% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
  3161 +\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
  3162 +
  3163 +
  3164 +% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
  3165 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
  3166 +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
  3167 +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
  3168 +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
  3169 +
  3170 +
  3171 +% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
  3172 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
  3173 +\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
  3174 +\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
  3175 +
  3176 +
  3177 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
  3178 +
  3179 +
  3180 +% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
  3181 +% used to build up the \halign preamble
  3182 +\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
  3183 +\@@IEEEappendtoksA}
  3184 +
  3185 +% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
  3186 +% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
  3187 +\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
  3188 +\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
  3189 +\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
  3190 +
  3191 +% define some common column types for the user
  3192 +% math
  3193 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
  3194 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
  3195 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
  3196 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
  3197 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
  3198 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
  3199 +% text
  3200 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
  3201 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
  3202 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
  3203 +
  3204 +% vertical rules
  3205 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
  3206 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
  3207 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
  3208 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
  3209 +{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
  3210 +
  3211 +% horizontal rules
  3212 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
  3213 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
  3214 +
  3215 +% plain
  3216 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
  3217 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
  3218 +
  3219 +% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
  3220 +\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
  3221 +
  3222 +
  3223 +% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
  3224 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
  3225 +% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
  3226 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
  3227 +
  3228 +% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
  3229 +% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
  3230 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
  3231 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
  3232 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
  3233 +
  3234 +
  3235 +
  3236 +% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
  3237 +% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
  3238 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
  3239 +% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness.
  3240 +\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
  3241 +
  3242 +% creates a blank separator row
  3243 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
  3244 +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
  3245 +% blank arguments inherit the default values
  3246 +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
  3247 +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
  3248 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
  3249 +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
  3250 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
  3251 +% get the skip value, based on the font commands
  3252 +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
  3253 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
  3254 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
  3255 +\else%
  3256 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
  3257 +\fi%
  3258 +\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
  3259 +
  3260 +% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
  3261 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
  3262 +% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
  3263 +% blank arguments inherit the default values
  3264 +% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
  3265 +\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
  3266 +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
  3267 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
  3268 +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
  3269 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
  3270 +\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
  3271 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
  3272 +% get the skip value, based on the font commands
  3273 +% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
  3274 +% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
  3275 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
  3276 +\else%
  3277 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
  3278 +\fi%
  3279 +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
  3280 +
  3281 +
  3282 +
  3283 +% draws a single rule across all the columns optional
  3284 +% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
  3285 +% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
  3286 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
  3287 +\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
  3288 +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
  3289 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
  3290 +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
  3291 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule
  3292 +% turn off any struts
  3293 +\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
  3294 +
  3295 +
  3296 +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
  3297 +% another single rule row
  3298 +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
  3299 +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
  3300 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
  3301 +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
  3302 +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
  3303 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
  3304 +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
  3305 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
  3306 +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
  3307 +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
  3308 +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
  3309 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
  3310 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
  3311 +\else%
  3312 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
  3313 +\fi%
  3314 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
  3315 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
  3316 +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
  3317 +\else%
  3318 +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
  3319 +\fi%
  3320 +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
  3321 +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
  3322 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
  3323 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
  3324 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
  3325 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
  3326 +\else%
  3327 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
  3328 +\fi%
  3329 +}
  3330 +
  3331 +% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
  3332 +% another single rule row
  3333 +% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
  3334 +% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
  3335 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
  3336 +\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
  3337 +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
  3338 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
  3339 +\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
  3340 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
  3341 +{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
  3342 +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
  3343 +% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
  3344 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
  3345 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
  3346 +\else%
  3347 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
  3348 +\fi%
  3349 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
  3350 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
  3351 +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
  3352 +\else%
  3353 +\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
  3354 +\fi%
  3355 +\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
  3356 +% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
  3357 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
  3358 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
  3359 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
  3360 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
  3361 +\else%
  3362 +\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
  3363 +\fi%
  3364 +}
  3365 +
  3366 +
  3367 +
  3368 +% inserts a full row's worth of &'s
  3369 +% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
  3370 +% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
  3371 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
  3372 +\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
  3373 +\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
  3374 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
  3375 +\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
  3376 +\repeat%
  3377 +\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
  3378 +}
  3379 +
  3380 +
  3381 +
  3382 +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
  3383 +\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
  3384 +
  3385 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
  3386 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
  3387 +
  3388 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
  3389 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
  3390 +
  3391 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
  3392 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
  3393 +
  3394 +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
  3395 +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used
  3396 +
  3397 +
  3398 +
  3399 +% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
  3400 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
  3401 +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
  3402 +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
  3403 +% remove stretchability
  3404 +\dimen0\skip0\relax%
  3405 +\dimen2\skip2\relax%
  3406 +% save values
  3407 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
  3408 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
  3409 +
  3410 +% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
  3411 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
  3412 +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
  3413 +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
  3414 +% remove stretchability
  3415 +\dimen0\skip0\relax%
  3416 +\dimen2\skip2\relax%
  3417 +% restore values
  3418 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3419 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
  3420 +
  3421 +
  3422 +% globally restores the strut height and depth to the
  3423 +% master values and sets the master strut flag to true
  3424 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
  3425 +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
  3426 +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
  3427 +% remove stretchability
  3428 +\dimen0\skip0\relax%
  3429 +\dimen2\skip2\relax%
  3430 +% restore values
  3431 +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3432 +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
  3433 +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
  3434 +
  3435 +
  3436 +% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
  3437 +% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
  3438 +% and the use master strut flag, global
  3439 +% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
  3440 +% into the isolation/strut column
  3441 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
  3442 +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
  3443 +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
  3444 +\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
  3445 +\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
  3446 +\fi}
  3447 +
  3448 +
  3449 +
  3450 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
  3451 +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
  3452 +% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
  3453 +% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
  3454 +% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
  3455 +% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
  3456 +% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
  3457 +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
  3458 +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
  3459 +% font is used.
  3460 +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
  3461 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
  3462 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
  3463 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
  3464 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
  3465 +\skip0=\skip3\relax%
  3466 +\else% arg one present
  3467 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
  3468 +\skip0=\skip3\relax%
  3469 +\fi% if null arg
  3470 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
  3471 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
  3472 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
  3473 +\skip2=\skip3\relax%
  3474 +\else% arg two present
  3475 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
  3476 +\skip2=\skip3\relax%
  3477 +\fi% if null arg
  3478 +% remove stretchability, just to be safe
  3479 +\dimen0\skip0\relax%
  3480 +\dimen2\skip2\relax%
  3481 +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
  3482 +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
  3483 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3484 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
  3485 +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
  3486 +\else% outer, have to set master strut too
  3487 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3488 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
  3489 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3490 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
  3491 +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
  3492 +\fi}
  3493 +
  3494 +
  3495 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
  3496 +% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
  3497 +% and depth to both the master and local struts.
  3498 +% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
  3499 +% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use
  3500 +% of the local strut values.
  3501 +% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
  3502 +% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
  3503 +% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
  3504 +% font is used.
  3505 +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
  3506 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
  3507 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
  3508 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
  3509 +\skip0=0pt\relax%
  3510 +\else% arg one present
  3511 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
  3512 +\skip0=\skip3\relax%
  3513 +\fi% if null arg
  3514 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
  3515 +\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
  3516 +\skip2=0pt\relax%
  3517 +\else% arg two present
  3518 +{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
  3519 +\skip2=\skip3\relax%
  3520 +\fi% if null arg
  3521 +% remove stretchability, just to be safe
  3522 +\dimen0\skip0\relax%
  3523 +\dimen2\skip2\relax%
  3524 +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
  3525 +\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
  3526 +% get local strut size
  3527 +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
  3528 +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
  3529 +% add it to the user supplied values
  3530 +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
  3531 +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
  3532 +% update the local strut size
  3533 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3534 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
  3535 +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
  3536 +\else% outer, have to set master strut too
  3537 +% get master strut size
  3538 +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
  3539 +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
  3540 +% add it to the user supplied values
  3541 +\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
  3542 +\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
  3543 +% update the local and master strut sizes
  3544 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3545 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
  3546 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
  3547 +\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
  3548 +\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
  3549 +\fi}
  3550 +
  3551 +
  3552 +% allow user a way to see the struts
  3553 +\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
  3554 +\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
  3555 +
  3556 +% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
  3557 +% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
  3558 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
  3559 +\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
  3560 +% get master strut size
  3561 +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
  3562 +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
  3563 +\else%
  3564 +% get local strut size
  3565 +\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
  3566 +\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
  3567 +\fi%
  3568 +% remove stretchability, probably not needed
  3569 +\dimen0\skip0\relax%
  3570 +\dimen2\skip2\relax%
  3571 +% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
  3572 +% allow user to see struts if desired
  3573 +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
  3574 +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
  3575 +\else%
  3576 +\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
  3577 +
  3578 +
  3579 +% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
  3580 +% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide.
  3581 +% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
  3582 +% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
  3583 +% blank arguments inherit the default values
  3584 +% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
  3585 +\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
  3586 +\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
  3587 +\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
  3588 +\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
  3589 +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
  3590 +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
  3591 +\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
  3592 +\else%
  3593 +\skip0=#1\relax%
  3594 +\fi%
  3595 +\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
  3596 +\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
  3597 +\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
  3598 +\else%
  3599 +\skip2=#2\relax%
  3600 +\fi%
  3601 +% remove stretchability, probably not needed
  3602 +\dimen0\skip0\relax%
  3603 +\dimen2\skip2\relax%
  3604 +\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
  3605 +\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
  3606 +\else%
  3607 +\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
  3608 +
  3609 +
  3610 +% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
  3611 +% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
  3612 +\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
  3613 +\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
  3614 +
  3615 +
  3616 +% equation and subequation forms to use to setup hyperref's \@currentHref
  3617 +\def\@IEEEtheHrefequation{equation.\theHequation}
  3618 +\def\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation{equation.\theHequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}}
  3619 +
  3620 +
  3621 +\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
  3622 +\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
  3623 +
  3624 +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
  3625 +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
  3626 +
  3627 +
  3628 +% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray.
  3629 +% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
  3630 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
  3631 +\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
  3632 +% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the
  3633 +% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject
  3634 +% to document catcode changes.
  3635 +\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]{\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]}
  3636 +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{\endgroup
  3637 + % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
  3638 + % the star form was involked
  3639 + \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue
  3640 + \else% not the star form
  3641 + \global\@eqnswfalse
  3642 + \fi% if star form
  3643 + % provide a basic hyperref \theHequation if this has not already been setup (hyperref not loaded, or no section counter)
  3644 + \@ifundefined{theHequation}{\def\theHequation{\arabic{equation}}}{}\relax
  3645 + % provide dummy hyperref commands in case hyperref is not loaded
  3646 + \providecommand{\Hy@raisedlink}[1]{}\relax
  3647 + \providecommand{\hyper@anchorstart}[1]{}\relax
  3648 + \providecommand{\hyper@anchorend}{}\relax
  3649 + \providecommand{\@currentHref}{}\relax
  3650 + \@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse% reset eqnpreadv flag
  3651 + \@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% reset subeqnpreadv flag
  3652 + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
  3653 + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
  3654 + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
  3655 + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
  3656 + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
  3657 + \lineskip=0pt\relax
  3658 + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
  3659 + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
  3660 + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
  3661 + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
  3662 + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
  3663 + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
  3664 + %V1.8 Here we preadvance to the next equation number.
  3665 + % If the user later wants a continued subequation, we can roll back.
  3666 + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation%
  3667 + \stepcounter{equation}\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue% advance equation counter before first line
  3668 + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet
  3669 + \let\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave\@currentlabel% save current label as we later change it globally
  3670 + \let\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave\@currentHref% save current href label as we later change it globally
  3671 + \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
  3672 + \def\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
  3673 + \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
  3674 + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
  3675 + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
  3676 + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
  3677 + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
  3678 + % put in the column for the equation number
  3679 + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
  3680 + \toks0={##}%
  3681 + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
  3682 + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
  3683 + % add the isolation column
  3684 + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
  3685 + % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
  3686 + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
  3687 + % add the equation number col to the preamble
  3688 + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
  3689 + % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
  3690 + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
  3691 + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
  3692 + % begin the display alignment
  3693 + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
  3694 + $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
  3695 + % "exspand" the preamble
  3696 + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
  3697 +
  3698 +% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
  3699 +% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
  3700 +% restore counters (to backout any equation setup for a next line that was never used)
  3701 +% to their correct values and exit
  3702 +\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup
  3703 +\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi
  3704 +\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\fi
  3705 +\global\let\@currentlabel\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave% restore current label
  3706 +\global\let\@currentHref\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave% restore current href label
  3707 +$$\@ignoretrue}
  3708 +
  3709 +
  3710 +% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
  3711 +% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
  3712 +% These "cr" macros are modified versions of those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
  3713 +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
  3714 +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
  3715 +% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
  3716 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
  3717 + {\ifnum0=`}\fi
  3718 + \@ifstar{%
  3719 + \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
  3720 + }{%
  3721 + \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
  3722 + }%
  3723 +}
  3724 +
  3725 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
  3726 +
  3727 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
  3728 + \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
  3729 + \@@IEEEeqnarraycr
  3730 + \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
  3731 +
  3732 +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
  3733 + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
  3734 + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
  3735 + \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
  3736 + environment}%
  3737 + {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarray column\MessageBreak
  3738 + specifications.}\relax%
  3739 + \else
  3740 + \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
  3741 + \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
  3742 + \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
  3743 + \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
  3744 + \repeat
  3745 + % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
  3746 + \fi
  3747 + % execute the &'s
  3748 + \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
  3749 + % handle the strut/isolation column
  3750 + \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
  3751 + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
  3752 + &% and enter the equation number column
  3753 + \if@eqnsw% only if we display something
  3754 + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}}% start a hyperref anchor
  3755 + \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% displaying an equation number means
  3756 + \global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% the equation counters point to valid equations
  3757 + % V1.8 Here we setup the counters, currentlabel and status for what would be the *next*
  3758 + % equation line as would be the case under the current settings. However, there are two problems.
  3759 + % One problem is that there might not ever be a next line. The second problem is that the user
  3760 + % may later alter the meaning of a line with commands such as \IEEEyessubnumber. So, to handle
  3761 + % these cases we have to record the current values of the (sub)equation counters and revert back
  3762 + % to them if the next line is changed or never comes. The \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv, \if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv
  3763 + % and \@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback stuff tracks this.
  3764 + % The logic to handle all this is surprisingly complex, but a nice feature of the approach here is
  3765 + % that the equation counters and labels remain valid for what the line would be unless a
  3766 + % \IEEEyessubnumber et al. later changes it. So, any hyperref links are always correct.
  3767 + \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% handle subequation
  3768 + \theIEEEsubequationdis\relax
  3769 + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line
  3770 + \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
  3771 + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
  3772 + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
  3773 + \else
  3774 + % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number
  3775 + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation
  3776 + \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
  3777 + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
  3778 + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
  3779 + \fi
  3780 + \else% display a standard equation number
  3781 + \theequationdis\relax
  3782 + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax% not really needed
  3783 + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line
  3784 + % subequations that follow plain equations carry the same equation number e.g, 5, 5a rather than 5, 6a
  3785 + \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
  3786 + \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
  3787 + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
  3788 + \else
  3789 + % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number
  3790 + \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation
  3791 + \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
  3792 + \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
  3793 + \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
  3794 + \fi
  3795 + \fi%
  3796 + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorend}% end hyperref anchor
  3797 + \fi% fi only if we display something
  3798 + % reset the flags to indicate the default preferences of the display of equation numbers
  3799 + \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\else\global\@eqnswfalse\fi
  3800 + \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\fi% ditto for the subequation flag
  3801 + % reset the number of columns the user actually used
  3802 + \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
  3803 + % the real end of the line
  3804 + \cr}
  3805 +
  3806 +
  3807 +
  3808 +
  3809 +
  3810 +% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
  3811 +% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
  3812 +% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
  3813 +% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
  3814 +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
  3815 +% within an hbox.
  3816 +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
  3817 +% a \hbox{$ $} construct.
  3818 +% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or
  3819 +% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
  3820 +% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
  3821 +% natural width is the default.
  3822 +% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
  3823 +% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
  3824 +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3825 +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3826 +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3827 +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3828 +
  3829 +\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3830 +\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3831 +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3832 +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3833 +
  3834 +\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
  3835 +\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3836 +\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3837 +
  3838 +\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
  3839 +\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3840 +\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
  3841 +
  3842 +% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $}
  3843 +% for \vcenter in non-math mode
  3844 +\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
  3845 +\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
  3846 +
  3847 +\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
  3848 +% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the
  3849 +% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject
  3850 +% to document catcode changes.
  3851 +\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
  3852 +\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
  3853 +
  3854 +% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
  3855 +\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\endgroup\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
  3856 + \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
  3857 + \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
  3858 + \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
  3859 + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
  3860 + % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
  3861 + \lineskip=0pt\relax%
  3862 + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
  3863 + \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
  3864 + \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
  3865 + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
  3866 + % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
  3867 + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
  3868 + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
  3869 + \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
  3870 + \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses,
  3871 + % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
  3872 + \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
  3873 + #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
  3874 + \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
  3875 + \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
  3876 + % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
  3877 + \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
  3878 + \toks0={##}%
  3879 + % add the isolation column to the preamble
  3880 + \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
  3881 + % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
  3882 + \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
  3883 + % begin the alignment
  3884 + \everycr{}%
  3885 + % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
  3886 + \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
  3887 + \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  3888 + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  3889 + \fi
  3890 + % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored
  3891 + % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
  3892 + \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
  3893 + % use the appropriate vbox type
  3894 + \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax%
  3895 + \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
  3896 + \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
  3897 + \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
  3898 + \bgroup
  3899 + % "exspand" the preamble
  3900 + \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
  3901 +
  3902 +% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column,
  3903 +% exit from math mode if needed, and exit
  3904 +\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
  3905 +&% enter isolation/strut column
  3906 +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
  3907 +\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
  3908 +% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
  3909 +% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
  3910 +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
  3911 +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
  3912 +\crcr\egroup\egroup%
  3913 +% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
  3914 +\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
  3915 +
  3916 +
  3917 +
  3918 +% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
  3919 +% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
  3920 +% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
  3921 +% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
  3922 +% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
  3923 +% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
  3924 +% carry strut status into isolation/strut column
  3925 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
  3926 +&% enter isolation/strut column
  3927 +\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
  3928 +% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
  3929 +\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
  3930 +{\ifnum0=`}\fi%
  3931 +\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
  3932 +
  3933 +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
  3934 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
  3935 +
  3936 +% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
  3937 +\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
  3938 +\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
  3939 +
  3940 +
  3941 +
  3942 +% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers}
  3943 +% starts the halign preamble build
  3944 +% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
  3945 +\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
  3946 +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
  3947 +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
  3948 +\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
  3949 +% ensure these are valid
  3950 +\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
  3951 +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
  3952 +% currently acquired numerically referenced glue
  3953 +% use a name that is easier to remember
  3954 +\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
  3955 +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
  3956 +% tracks number of columns in the preamble
  3957 +\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
  3958 +% record the default end glues
  3959 +\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
  3960 +\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
  3961 +\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers
  3962 +% now parse the user's column specifications
  3963 +% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because
  3964 +% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future
  3965 +\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax}
  3966 +
  3967 +
  3968 +% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column}
  3969 +% parses and builds the halign preamble
  3970 +\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
  3971 +% use only the very first token to check the end
  3972 +\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax
  3973 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
  3974 +% identify current and next token type
  3975 +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
  3976 +\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
  3977 +% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
  3978 +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
  3979 +% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
  3980 +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
  3981 +% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
  3982 +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
  3983 +% process the acquired glue
  3984 +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
  3985 +% process the acquired col
  3986 +\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
  3987 +% ready prevtype for next col spec.
  3988 +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
  3989 +% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
  3990 +\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
  3991 +
  3992 +
  3993 +% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded}
  3994 +% executed just after preamble build is completed
  3995 +% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
  3996 +% argument is not used
  3997 +\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
  3998 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
  3999 +{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
  4000 +\fi%num cols less than 1
  4001 +%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
  4002 +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
  4003 +
  4004 +
  4005 +% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more}
  4006 +% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given
  4007 +% \output macro:
  4008 +% n = number
  4009 +% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
  4010 +% c = letter
  4011 +% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence)
  4012 +% u = undefined
  4013 +% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
  4014 +\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
  4015 +% use only the very first token to determine the type
  4016 +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
  4017 +% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
  4018 +\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
  4019 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else
  4020 +\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
  4021 +\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4022 +\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4023 +\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4024 +\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4025 +\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4026 +\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4027 +\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4028 +\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4029 +\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4030 +\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
  4031 +\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax
  4032 +\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
  4033 +\if#2u\relax
  4034 +\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
  4035 +{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
  4036 +as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
  4037 +
  4038 +
  4039 +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier}
  4040 +% verify the letter referenced column exists
  4041 +% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname
  4042 +% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault
  4043 +\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
  4044 +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
  4045 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
  4046 +Using a default centering column instead}%
  4047 +{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
  4048 +\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
  4049 +
  4050 +
  4051 +% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output}
  4052 +% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value
  4053 +% and return it in the given output macro
  4054 +\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
  4055 +% ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
  4056 +% , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
  4057 +% : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
  4058 +% ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
  4059 +% ' = \quad 1em
  4060 +% " = \qquad 2em
  4061 +% . = 0.5\arraycolsep
  4062 +% / = \arraycolsep
  4063 +% ? = 2\arraycolsep
  4064 +% * = 1fil
  4065 +% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
  4066 +% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
  4067 +% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
  4068 +% value for 1em.
  4069 +%
  4070 +% use only the very first token to determine the type
  4071 +\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
  4072 +\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  4073 + \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  4074 +\fi
  4075 +% get the math font 1em value
  4076 +% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
  4077 +% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
  4078 +% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
  4079 +% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
  4080 +% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
  4081 +% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
  4082 +{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
  4083 +% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
  4084 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
  4085 +% identify the glue value based on the first token
  4086 +% we discard anything after the first
  4087 +\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4088 +\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4089 +\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4090 +\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4091 +\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4092 +\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4093 +\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4094 +\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
  4095 +\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
  4096 +\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
  4097 +\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
  4098 +\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
  4099 +\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
  4100 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
  4101 +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
  4102 +0pt instead}%
  4103 +{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak
  4104 +IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
  4105 +
  4106 +
  4107 +% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit}
  4108 +% process a numerical digit from the column specification
  4109 +% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
  4110 +% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
  4111 +\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
  4112 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
  4113 +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
  4114 +after the first}%
  4115 +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
  4116 +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
  4117 +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
  4118 +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
  4119 +\else% if we previously aborted a glue
  4120 +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
  4121 +\else%acquire this number
  4122 +% save the previous type before the numerical digits started
  4123 +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
  4124 +\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
  4125 +\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
  4126 +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
  4127 +\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
  4128 +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
  4129 +\else%user glue not defined
  4130 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
  4131 +column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
  4132 +0pt instead}%
  4133 +{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
  4134 +\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
  4135 +\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
  4136 +\fi% glue defined or not
  4137 +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
  4138 +\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
  4139 +\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
  4140 +\fi%close acquisition, get glue
  4141 +\fi%discard or acquire number
  4142 +\fi%prevtype glue or not
  4143 +}
  4144 +
  4145 +
  4146 +% process an acquired glue
  4147 +% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
  4148 +\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
  4149 +\else
  4150 +% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else
  4151 +% as this is not used in the preamble, but before
  4152 +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
  4153 +\else%not the start glue
  4154 +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
  4155 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
  4156 +specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
  4157 +after the first}%
  4158 +{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak
  4159 +in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
  4160 +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
  4161 +\else% not a back to back glue
  4162 +\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
  4163 +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
  4164 +\toks0={##}%
  4165 +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
  4166 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
  4167 +% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
  4168 +% the column definition
  4169 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
  4170 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
  4171 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
  4172 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
  4173 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
  4174 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
  4175 +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
  4176 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
  4177 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
  4178 +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
  4179 +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
  4180 +\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
  4181 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
  4182 +type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak
  4183 +specifier}%
  4184 +{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
  4185 +between column types.}%
  4186 +\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
  4187 +\fi% previous was a column
  4188 +\fi% back-to-back glues
  4189 +\fi% is start column glue
  4190 +\fi% prev type not a
  4191 +}
  4192 +
  4193 +
  4194 +% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
  4195 +\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
  4196 +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
  4197 +% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
  4198 +% so we must add this column to the preamble now
  4199 +\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
  4200 +\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
  4201 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
  4202 +\toks0={##}%
  4203 +% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
  4204 +\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
  4205 +% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
  4206 +% the column definition
  4207 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
  4208 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
  4209 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
  4210 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
  4211 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
  4212 +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
  4213 +\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
  4214 +\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
  4215 +\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
  4216 +\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
  4217 +\fi%next type not numeral
  4218 +\fi%next type not glue
  4219 +}
  4220 +
  4221 +
  4222 +%%
  4223 +%% END OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS
  4224 +%%
  4225 +
  4226 +
  4227 +
  4228 +
  4229 +
  4230 +% set up the running headers and footers
  4231 +%
  4232 +% header and footer font and size specifications
  4233 +\def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize}
  4234 +\def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize}
  4235 +%
  4236 +% compsoc uses sans-serif headers and footers
  4237 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  4238 + \def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize}
  4239 + \def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize}
  4240 +\fi
  4241 +
  4242 +
  4243 +% standard page style, ps@headings
  4244 +\def\ps@headings{% default to standard twoside headers, no footers
  4245 +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
  4246 +\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\rightmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
  4247 +\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
  4248 +\let\@oddfoot\@empty
  4249 +\let\@evenfoot\@empty
  4250 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
  4251 + % technote twoside
  4252 + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
  4253 + \def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
  4254 +\fi
  4255 +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  4256 + % draft footers
  4257 + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
  4258 + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
  4259 +\fi
  4260 +% oneside
  4261 +\if@twoside\else
  4262 + % standard one side headers
  4263 + \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
  4264 + \let\@evenhead\@empty
  4265 + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  4266 + % oneside draft footers
  4267 + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
  4268 + \let\@evenfoot\@empty
  4269 + \fi
  4270 +\fi
  4271 +% turn off headers for conferences
  4272 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  4273 + \let\@oddhead\@empty
  4274 + \let\@evenhead\@empty
  4275 +\fi
  4276 +% turn off footers for draftclsnofoot
  4277 +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
  4278 + \let\@oddfoot\@empty
  4279 + \let\@evenfoot\@empty
  4280 +\fi}
  4281 +
  4282 +
  4283 +% title page style, ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle
  4284 +\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{% default title page headers, no footers
  4285 +\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
  4286 +\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
  4287 +\let\@oddfoot\@empty
  4288 +\let\@evenfoot\@empty
  4289 +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
  4290 +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  4291 + % draft footers
  4292 + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
  4293 + % but only if not draftclsnofoot
  4294 + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
  4295 + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
  4296 + \fi
  4297 +\else
  4298 + % all nondraft mode footers
  4299 + \if@IEEEusingpubid
  4300 + % for title pages that are using a pubid
  4301 + % do not repeat pubid on the title page if using a peer review cover page
  4302 + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
  4303 + % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and
  4304 + % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be
  4305 + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4306 + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4307 + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  4308 + % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer
  4309 + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4310 + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4311 + \fi
  4312 + \fi
  4313 + \fi
  4314 +\fi
  4315 +% turn off headers for conferences
  4316 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  4317 + \let\@oddhead\@empty
  4318 + \let\@evenhead\@empty
  4319 +\fi}
  4320 +
  4321 +
  4322 +% peer review cover page style, ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle
  4323 +\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% default peer review cover no headers, no footers
  4324 +\let\@oddhead\@empty
  4325 +\let\@evenhead\@empty
  4326 +\let\@oddfoot\@empty
  4327 +\let\@evenfoot\@empty
  4328 +% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
  4329 +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  4330 + % draft footers
  4331 + \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
  4332 + % but only if not draftclsnofoot
  4333 + \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
  4334 + \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
  4335 + \fi
  4336 +\else
  4337 + % all nondraft mode footers
  4338 + \if@IEEEusingpubid
  4339 + % for peer review cover pages that are using a pubid
  4340 + % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and
  4341 + % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be
  4342 + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4343 + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4344 + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  4345 + % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer
  4346 + \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4347 + \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
  4348 + \fi
  4349 + \fi
  4350 +\fi}
  4351 +
  4352 +
  4353 +
  4354 +%% Defines the command for putting the header.
  4355 +%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
  4356 +%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
  4357 +%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
  4358 +%% arguments to \markboth.
  4359 +%% V1.7b add \protect to work with Babel
  4360 +\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#1}}%
  4361 +\def\rightmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#2}}}
  4362 +
  4363 +\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
  4364 + January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
  4365 + July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
  4366 + \space\number\day, \number\year}
  4367 +
  4368 +
  4369 +
  4370 +
  4371 +%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
  4372 +%%
  4373 +%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
  4374 +%
  4375 +%
  4376 +% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
  4377 +\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
  4378 + \let\@citea\@empty
  4379 + \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
  4380 + {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
  4381 + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
  4382 + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
  4383 + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
  4384 + \G@refundefinedtrue
  4385 + \@latex@warning
  4386 + {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
  4387 + {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
  4388 +
  4389 +% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
  4390 +% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
  4391 +% following format controls are already defined and will not
  4392 +% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
  4393 +% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
  4394 +% all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
  4395 +% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
  4396 +% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
  4397 +% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
  4398 +% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
  4399 +% that \cite.
  4400 +% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
  4401 +% to produce the IEEE style.
  4402 +\def\citepunct{], [}
  4403 +\def\citedash{]--[}
  4404 +
  4405 +% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
  4406 +\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}
  4407 +
  4408 +% V1.6 class files should always provide these
  4409 +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
  4410 +\let\@openbib@code\@empty
  4411 +% V1.8b article.cls is now providing these too
  4412 +% we do not use \@mkboth, nor alter the page style
  4413 +\newenvironment{theindex}
  4414 + {\if@twocolumn
  4415 + \@restonecolfalse
  4416 + \else
  4417 + \@restonecoltrue
  4418 + \fi
  4419 + \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
  4420 + \parindent\z@
  4421 + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
  4422 + \columnseprule \z@
  4423 + \columnsep 35\p@
  4424 + \let\item\@idxitem}
  4425 + {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
  4426 +\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
  4427 +\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}}
  4428 +\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}}
  4429 +\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}
  4430 +
  4431 +
  4432 +
  4433 +% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
  4434 +% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
  4435 +% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
  4436 +% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
  4437 +% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
  4438 +\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
  4439 +\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
  4440 + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
  4441 + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
  4442 + \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
  4443 + \@esphack}
  4444 +
  4445 +% \IEEEnoauxwrite{} allows for citations that do not add to or affect
  4446 +% the order of the existing citation list. Can be useful for \cite
  4447 +% within \thanks{}.
  4448 +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEnoauxwrite}[1]{\relax
  4449 +\if@filesw
  4450 +\@fileswfalse
  4451 +#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
  4452 +\@fileswtrue
  4453 +\else
  4454 +#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
  4455 +\fi}
  4456 +
  4457 +% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before
  4458 +% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
  4459 +% the columns on the last page
  4460 +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that
  4461 + % the command is not executed
  4462 +\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
  4463 +
  4464 +% allow the user to alter the triggered command
  4465 +\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
  4466 +
  4467 +% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
  4468 +% command is executed
  4469 +\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
  4470 +\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
  4471 +
  4472 +% trigger command at the given reference
  4473 +\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
  4474 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
  4475 +\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
  4476 +
  4477 +
  4478 +\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
  4479 +
  4480 +% compsoc journals and conferences left align the reference numbers
  4481 +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
  4482 +
  4483 +% controls bib item spacing
  4484 +\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
  4485 +
  4486 +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
  4487 +
  4488 +
  4489 +\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
  4490 + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
  4491 + % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
  4492 + \footnotesize\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
  4493 + \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
  4494 + {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
  4495 + \leftmargin\labelwidth
  4496 + \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
  4497 + \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
  4498 + \usecounter{enumiv}%
  4499 + \let\p@enumiv\@empty
  4500 + \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
  4501 + \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
  4502 + \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
  4503 +\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
  4504 +% originally:
  4505 +% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
  4506 +% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
  4507 +% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
  4508 +% The IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
  4509 +% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography,
  4510 +% but the final result will be much more like what the IEEE will publish.
  4511 +% MDS 11/2000
  4512 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
  4513 +\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
  4514 + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
  4515 +\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
  4516 +
  4517 +
  4518 +
  4519 +
  4520 +% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
  4521 +%
  4522 +%
  4523 +% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author
  4524 +% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
  4525 +\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
  4526 +
  4527 +
  4528 +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
  4529 +% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
  4530 +% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{}
  4531 +% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you
  4532 +% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
  4533 +% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
  4534 +% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
  4535 +% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
  4536 +% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
  4537 +% with the text above.
  4538 +% V1.7 make this a robust command
  4539 +% V1.8 transmag uses an arabic author affiliation symbol
  4540 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
  4541 +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize #1}}}
  4542 +\else
  4543 +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
  4544 + \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
  4545 + \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
  4546 +\fi
  4547 +
  4548 +
  4549 +% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
  4550 +%
  4551 +% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
  4552 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
  4553 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize}
  4554 +% The default if the user does not use an author block
  4555 +\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
  4556 +
  4557 +% adjustment spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
  4558 +% can be negative
  4559 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
  4560 +% compsoc conferences need more space here
  4561 +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
  4562 +
  4563 +% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
  4564 +% This can be negative.
  4565 +% The IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
  4566 +% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
  4567 +% Personally, I like 0.75ex.
  4568 +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
  4569 +%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
  4570 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
  4571 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
  4572 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
  4573 +% transmag uses one line of space above first affiliation block
  4574 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{1\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
  4575 +\fi
  4576 +
  4577 +% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
  4578 +% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make
  4579 +% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
  4580 +% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders,
  4581 +% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
  4582 +% these above 2.6ex
  4583 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
  4584 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
  4585 +
  4586 +% This tracks the required strut size.
  4587 +% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
  4588 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
  4589 +
  4590 +% variables to retain font size and style across groups
  4591 +% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
  4592 +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
  4593 +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
  4594 +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
  4595 +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
  4596 +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
  4597 +\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
  4598 +
  4599 +% saves the current font attributes
  4600 +\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
  4601 +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
  4602 +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
  4603 +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
  4604 +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
  4605 +\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
  4606 +
  4607 +% restores the saved font attributes
  4608 +\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
  4609 +\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
  4610 +\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
  4611 +\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
  4612 +\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
  4613 +\selectfont}
  4614 +
  4615 +
  4616 +% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
  4617 +\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
  4618 +
  4619 +
  4620 +% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
  4621 +% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
  4622 +% within the halign environment.
  4623 +% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
  4624 +% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
  4625 +% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
  4626 +\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
  4627 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
  4628 +\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
  4629 +
  4630 +
  4631 +% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations.
  4632 +% Makes formatting easy for conferences
  4633 +%
  4634 +% use real definitions in conference mode
  4635 +% name block
  4636 +\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
  4637 +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
  4638 +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
  4639 +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
  4640 +% do a spacer row if needed
  4641 +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
  4642 +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
  4643 +%restore the correct strut value
  4644 +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
  4645 +% input the author names
  4646 +#1%
  4647 +% end the row if the user did not already
  4648 +\crcr}
  4649 +% spacer row for names
  4650 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
  4651 +%
  4652 +% affiliation block
  4653 +\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
  4654 +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
  4655 +% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
  4656 +% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
  4657 +% do a spacer row if needed
  4658 +\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
  4659 +\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
  4660 +%restore the correct strut value
  4661 +\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
  4662 +% input the author affiliations
  4663 +#1%
  4664 +% end the row if the user did not already
  4665 +\crcr
  4666 +% V1.8 transmag does not use any additional affiliation spacing after the first author
  4667 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0pt}\fi}
  4668 +
  4669 +% spacer row for affiliations
  4670 +\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
  4671 +
  4672 +
  4673 +% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
  4674 +% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
  4675 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  4676 +\else
  4677 + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
  4678 + % not conference, peerreviewca or transmag mode
  4679 + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\else
  4680 + \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
  4681 + \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
  4682 + \fi
  4683 + \fi
  4684 +\fi
  4685 +
  4686 +
  4687 +
  4688 +% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
  4689 +\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
  4690 + \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
  4691 + \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
  4692 + \baselineskip=0pt\relax%
  4693 + \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
  4694 + \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
  4695 + \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
  4696 + \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
  4697 + \everycr{}% ensure no problems here
  4698 + \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
  4699 + \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
  4700 + \vtop\bgroup%vtop box
  4701 + \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
  4702 + \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
  4703 +
  4704 +% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
  4705 +\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
  4706 +
  4707 +% handle bogus star form
  4708 +\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
  4709 +
  4710 +% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
  4711 +\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
  4712 +
  4713 +% end the line and do the optional spacer
  4714 +\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
  4715 +
  4716 +
  4717 +
  4718 +% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
  4719 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNand
  4720 +\@IEEEWARNandtrue
  4721 +
  4722 +% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
  4723 +% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
  4724 +% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
  4725 +\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
  4726 +
  4727 +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
  4728 + when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
  4729 +
  4730 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
  4731 +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
  4732 +\fi
  4733 +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
  4734 +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
  4735 +\fi
  4736 +% V1.8 transmag uses conference author format
  4737 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
  4738 +\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
  4739 +\fi
  4740 +
  4741 +% page clearing command
  4742 +% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
  4743 +% for the inserted blank pages
  4744 +\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
  4745 +\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
  4746 +
  4747 +% V1.8b hooks to allow adjustment of space above title
  4748 +\def\IEEEtitletopspace{0.5\baselineskip}
  4749 +% an added extra amount to allow for adjustment/offset
  4750 +\def\IEEEtitletopspaceextra{0pt}
  4751 +
  4752 +% user command to invoke the title page
  4753 +\def\maketitle{\par%
  4754 + \begingroup%
  4755 + \normalfont%
  4756 + \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty
  4757 + \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
  4758 + \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
  4759 + \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines
  4760 + \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
  4761 + % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
  4762 + \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
  4763 + \normalsize%
  4764 + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
  4765 + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
  4766 + \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
  4767 + \else
  4768 + \if@twocolumn%
  4769 + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
  4770 + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
  4771 + \else
  4772 + \twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@maketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}\@IEEEaftertitletext}]%
  4773 + \fi
  4774 + \else
  4775 + \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
  4776 + \fi
  4777 + \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
  4778 + \fi
  4779 + % pullup page for pubid if used.
  4780 + \if@IEEEusingpubid
  4781 + \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
  4782 + \fi
  4783 + \endgroup
  4784 + \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
  4785 + \gdef\@thanks{}%
  4786 + % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
  4787 + % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
  4788 + \let\thanks\relax}
  4789 +
  4790 +
  4791 +% V1.8 parbox to format \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext
  4792 +\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{1\textwidth}{#1}}
  4793 +% V1.8 compsoc is partial width
  4794 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  4795 +% comparison with proofs suggests it's in the range of 92.1-92.3%
  4796 +\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.922\textwidth}{\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\z@skip}#1}}
  4797 +\fi
  4798 +
  4799 +% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
  4800 +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
  4801 +% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
  4802 +\def\@maketitle{\newpage
  4803 +\bgroup\par\vskip\IEEEtitletopspace\vskip\IEEEtitletopspaceextra\centering%
  4804 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes, V1.8a abstract and index terms are not treated differently for compsoc technotes
  4805 + {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\Large\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\large\sffamily}\@author
  4806 + \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par}\relax
  4807 +\else% not a technote
  4808 + \vskip0.2em{\Huge\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\bfseries\LARGE\fi\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
  4809 + \bfseries\Large}\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\@title\par}\relax
  4810 + \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\vskip1.0em\par%
  4811 + % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
  4812 + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
  4813 + {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
  4814 + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
  4815 + \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
  4816 + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
  4817 + % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
  4818 + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
  4819 + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
  4820 + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
  4821 + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
  4822 + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
  4823 + \else% journal, peerreview or transmag
  4824 + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
  4825 + % transmag also handles author names just like conference mode
  4826 + % it also uses \@IEEEtitleabstractindextex, but with one line less
  4827 + % space above, and one more below
  4828 + {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
  4829 + \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
  4830 + {\vspace{0.5\baselineskip}\relax\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\par}}\relax
  4831 + \else% journal or peerreview
  4832 + {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
  4833 + {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
  4834 + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
  4835 + \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
  4836 + \fi
  4837 + \fi
  4838 + \fi
  4839 +\fi\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup}
  4840 +
  4841 +
  4842 +% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
  4843 +% V1.8a full width diamond line for single column use
  4844 +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
  4845 +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
  4846 +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
  4847 +% V1.8a narrower width diamond line for double column use
  4848 +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
  4849 +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
  4850 +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\relax}
  4851 +% V1.8a bare core without rules to base a last resort on for very narrow linewidths
  4852 +\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii{\mbox{}\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
  4853 +\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
  4854 +\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\mbox{}\relax}
  4855 +
  4856 +% V1.8a allow \IEEEcompsocdiamondline to adjust for different linewidths.
  4857 +% Use \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei if its width is less than 0.66\linewidth (0.487 nominal for single column)
  4858 +% if not, fall back to \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii if its width is less than 0.75\linewidth (0.659 nominal for double column)
  4859 +% if all else fails, try to make a custom diamondline based on the abnormally narrow linewidth
  4860 +\def\IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei}\relax
  4861 +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.66\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei\relax
  4862 +\else
  4863 +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii}\relax
  4864 +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.75\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii\relax
  4865 +\else
  4866 +\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii}\relax
  4867 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\linewidth\relax
  4868 +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{-1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\relax
  4869 +\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  4870 +\fi\fi}
  4871 +
  4872 +
  4873 +% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
  4874 +% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
  4875 +\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
  4876 +
  4877 +
  4878 +\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
  4879 + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
  4880 + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
  4881 + \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
  4882 +\let\@thanks\@empty
  4883 +
  4884 +
  4885 +% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
  4886 +\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
  4887 +
  4888 +
  4889 +% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
  4890 +% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
  4891 +\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
  4892 +\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{1.2em}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
  4893 +\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
  4894 +
  4895 +
  4896 +% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
  4897 +\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
  4898 +
  4899 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  4900 +% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
  4901 +% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \IEEEquantizevspace
  4902 +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
  4903 + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
  4904 + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
  4905 + {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
  4906 + \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
  4907 +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
  4908 +\else
  4909 +% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
  4910 +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
  4911 +% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
  4912 +\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
  4913 +{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
  4914 +% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
  4915 +\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
  4916 +\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
  4917 +\fi
  4918 +
  4919 +
  4920 +% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
  4921 +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
  4922 +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
  4923 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
  4924 +\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}}]
  4925 +\else
  4926 +\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
  4927 +\fi
  4928 +\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
  4929 +\else
  4930 +% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
  4931 +\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
  4932 +\fi
  4933 +
  4934 +% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
  4935 +\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
  4936 +\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
  4937 +\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup}
  4938 +
  4939 +
  4940 +
  4941 +% V1.6
  4942 +% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
  4943 +% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
  4944 +% of two column text (technotes).
  4945 +\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
  4946 +% adjust spacing to next text
  4947 +% v1.6b handle peer review papers
  4948 +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
  4949 +% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
  4950 +% regardless of the other paper modes
  4951 + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
  4952 +\else
  4953 + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
  4954 + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
  4955 + \else%
  4956 + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
  4957 + \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
  4958 + \else% journal uses more space
  4959 + \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
  4960 + \fi
  4961 + \fi
  4962 +\fi}}
  4963 +
  4964 +
  4965 +% set the nominal and minimum values for the quantized title spacer
  4966 +% the quantization algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
  4967 +% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be lengthened
  4968 +% default to journal values
  4969 +\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}
  4970 +\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}
  4971 +% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
  4972 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
  4973 + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
  4974 + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
  4975 +\fi
  4976 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
  4977 + \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
  4978 + \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
  4979 +\fi
  4980 +
  4981 +
  4982 +% V1.8a
  4983 +\def\IEEEquantizevspace{\begingroup\@ifstar{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformtrue\@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformfalse\@IEEEquantizevspace}}
  4984 +% \IEEEquantizevspace[output dimen register]{object}[object decl]
  4985 +% {top baselineskip}
  4986 +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
  4987 +% {unit height}{nominal vspace}{minimum vspace}
  4988 +%
  4989 +% Calculates and creates the vspace needed to make the combined height with
  4990 +% the given object an integer multiple of the given unit height. This command
  4991 +% is more general than the older \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace it replaces.
  4992 +%
  4993 +% The star form has no effect at present, but is reserved for future use.
  4994 +%
  4995 +% If the optional argument [output dimen register] is given, the calculated
  4996 +% vspace height is stored in the given output dimen (or skip) register
  4997 +% and no other action is taken, otherwise the object followed by a vspace*
  4998 +% of the appropriate height is evaluated/output.
  4999 +%
  5000 +% The optional object decl (declarations) is code that is evaluated just
  5001 +% before the object's height is evaluated. Its intented purpose is to allow
  5002 +% for the alteration or disabling of code within the object during internal
  5003 +% height evaluation (e.g., \long\def\thanks#1{\relax} ).
  5004 +% This special code is not invoked if/when the object is rendered at the end.
  5005 +%
  5006 +% The nominal vspace is the target value of the added vspace and the minimum
  5007 +% vspace is the lower allowed limit. The vspacer will be the value that achieves
  5008 +% integral overall height, in terms of the given unit height, that is closest
  5009 +% to the nominal vspace and that is not less than the specified minimum vspace.
  5010 +%
  5011 +% The line spacing algorithm of TeX is somewhat involved and requires special
  5012 +% care with regard to the first line of a vertical list (which is indicated
  5013 +% when \prevdepth is -1000pt or less). top baselineskip specifies the
  5014 +% baselineskip or topskip used prior to the object. If the height of the
  5015 +% first line of the object is greater than the given top baselineskip, then
  5016 +% the top baselineskip is subtracted from the height of the first line and
  5017 +% that difference is considered along with the rest of the object height
  5018 +% (because the object will be shifted down by an amount =
  5019 +% top line height - top baselineskip). Otherwise, the height of the first line
  5020 +% of the object is ignored as far as the calculations are concerned.
  5021 +% This algorithm is adequate for objects that appear at the top of a page
  5022 +% (e.g., titles) where \topskip spacing is used.
  5023 +%
  5024 +% However, as explained on page 78 of the TeXbook, interline spacing is more
  5025 +% complex when \baselineskip is being used (indicated by \prevdepth >
  5026 +% -1000pt). The four optional parameters offset, prevdepth, lineskip limit and
  5027 +% lineskip are assumed to be equal to be 0pt, \prevdepth, \lineskiplimit and
  5028 +% \lineskip, respectively, if they are omitted.
  5029 +%
  5030 +% The prevdepth is the depth of the line before the object, the lineskip limit
  5031 +% specifies how close the top of the object can come to the bottom of the
  5032 +% previous line before \baselineskip is ignored and \lineskip is inserted
  5033 +% between the object and the line above it. Lineskip does not come into
  5034 +% play unless the first line of the object is high enough to "get too close"
  5035 +% (as specified by lineskiplimit) to the line before it. The the prevdepth,
  5036 +% lineskip limit, and lineskip optional parameters are not needed for the
  5037 +% first object/line on a page (i.e., prevdepth <= -1000pt) where the simplier
  5038 +% \topskip spacing rules are in effect.
  5039 +%
  5040 +% Offset is a manual adjustment that is added to the height calculations of
  5041 +% object irrespective of the value of \prevdepth. It is useful when the top
  5042 +% baselineskip will result in a noninteger unit height object placement even
  5043 +% if the object itself has integral height. e.g., a footnotesize baselineskip
  5044 +% is used before the object, thus an offset of, say -3pt, can be given as a
  5045 +% correction.
  5046 +
  5047 +% Common combinations of these parameters include:
  5048 +%
  5049 +% top baselineskip: (and default values for offset, prevdepth, etc.)
  5050 +% \topskip % for objects that appear at the top of a page
  5051 +% \maxdimen % always ignore the height of the top line
  5052 +% 0pt % always consider any positive height of the top line
  5053 +%
  5054 +% for objects to appear inline in normal text:
  5055 +% top baselineskip = \baselineskip
  5056 +%
  5057 +% set prevdepth = -1000pt and top baselineskip = 0pt to consider the
  5058 +% overall height of the object without any other external skip
  5059 +% consideration
  5060 +
  5061 +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspacestarform % flag to indicate star form
  5062 +\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg % flag to indicate output dimen register is to be used
  5063 +% Use our own private registers because the object could contain a
  5064 +% structure that uses the existing tmp scratch pad registers
  5065 +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightA
  5066 +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightB
  5067 +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightC
  5068 +\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth % need to save this early as can change
  5069 +\newcount\@IEEEquantizemultiple
  5070 +\newbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA
  5071 +
  5072 +
  5073 +\def\@IEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregtrue\@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregfalse\@@IEEEquantizevspace[]}}
  5074 +
  5075 +
  5076 +\long\def\@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
  5077 +% acquire and store
  5078 +% #1 optional output dimen register
  5079 +% #2 object
  5080 +\edef\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg{#1}\relax
  5081 +% allow for object specifications that contain parameters
  5082 +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#2}\relax
  5083 +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobject{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
  5084 +\@ifnextchar [{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[\relax]}}
  5085 +
  5086 +\long\def\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
  5087 +% acquire and store
  5088 +% [#1] optional object decl, is \relax if not given by user
  5089 +% #2 top baselineskip
  5090 +% allow for object decl specifications that have parameters
  5091 +\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#1}\relax
  5092 +\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
  5093 +\edef\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip{#2}\ivIEEEquantizevspace}
  5094 +
  5095 +% acquire optional argument set and store
  5096 +% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
  5097 +\def\ivIEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@vIEEEquantizevspace}{\@vIEEEquantizevspace[0pt]}}
  5098 +\def\@vIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizeoffset{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viIEEEquantizevspace[\prevdepth]}}
  5099 +\def\@viIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth=#1\relax\@ifnextchar [{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskiplimit]}}
  5100 +\def\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskip]}}
  5101 +\def\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskip{#1}\@ixIEEEquantizevspace}
  5102 +
  5103 +% main routine
  5104 +\def\@ixIEEEquantizevspace#1#2#3{\relax
  5105 +\edef\@IEEEquantizeunitheight{#1}\relax
  5106 +\edef\@IEEEquantizenomvspace{#2}\relax
  5107 +\edef\@IEEEquantizeminvspace{#3}\relax
  5108 +% \@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg
  5109 +% \@IEEEquantizeobject
  5110 +% \@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl
  5111 +% \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
  5112 +% \@IEEEquantizeoffset
  5113 +% \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth
  5114 +% \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
  5115 +% \@IEEEquantizelineskip
  5116 +% \@IEEEquantizeunitheight
  5117 +% \@IEEEquantizenomvspace
  5118 +% \@IEEEquantizeminvspace
  5119 +% get overall height of object
  5120 +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vbox{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
  5121 +\@IEEEquantizeheightA\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
  5122 +% get height of first line of object
  5123 +\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vtop{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
  5124 +\@IEEEquantizeheightB\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
  5125 +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth>-1000pt\relax % prevdepth > -1000pf means full baselineskip\lineskip rules in effect
  5126 +% lineskip spacing rule takes effect if height of top line > baselineskip - prevdepth - lineskiplimit,
  5127 +% otherwise the baselineskip rule is in effect and the height of the first line does not matter at all.
  5128 +\@IEEEquantizeheightC=\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
  5129 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
  5130 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit\relax % this works even though \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit is a macro because TeX allows --10pt notation
  5131 +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
  5132 +% lineskip spacing rule is in effect i.e., the object is going to be shifted down relative to the
  5133 +% baselineskip set position by its top line height (already a part of the total height) + prevdepth + lineskip - baselineskip
  5134 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
  5135 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizelineskip\relax
  5136 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
  5137 +\else
  5138 +% height of first line <= \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip - \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth - \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
  5139 +% standard baselineskip rules are in effect, so don't consider height of first line
  5140 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
  5141 +\fi
  5142 +%
  5143 +\else % prevdepth <= -1000pt, simplier \topskip type rules in effect
  5144 +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
  5145 +% height of top line (already included in the total height) in excess of
  5146 +% baselineskip is the amount it will be downshifted
  5147 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
  5148 +\else
  5149 +% height of first line is irrelevant, remove it
  5150 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
  5151 +\fi
  5152 +\fi % prevdepth <= -1000pt
  5153 +%
  5154 +% adjust height for any manual offset
  5155 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeoffset\relax
  5156 +% add in nominal spacer
  5157 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
  5158 +% check for nonzero unitheight
  5159 +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=\@IEEEquantizeunitheight\relax
  5160 +\ifnum\@IEEEquantizeheightB=0\relax
  5161 +\@IEEEclspkgerror{IEEEquantizevspace unit height cannot be zero. Assuming 10pt.}%
  5162 +{Division by zero is not allowed.}
  5163 +\@IEEEquantizeheightB=10pt\relax
  5164 +\fi
  5165 +% get integer number of lines
  5166 +\@IEEEquantizemultiple=\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
  5167 +\divide\@IEEEquantizemultiple\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
  5168 +% set A to contain the excess height over the \@IEEEquantizemultiple of lines
  5169 +% A = height - multiple*unitheight
  5170 +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
  5171 +\multiply\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizemultiple\relax
  5172 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
  5173 +% set B to contain the height short of \@IEEEquantizemultiple+1 of lines
  5174 +% B = unitheight - A
  5175 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightB-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
  5176 +% choose A or B based on which is closer
  5177 +\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
  5178 +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightA<\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
  5179 +% C = nomvspace - A, go with lower
  5180 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
  5181 +\else
  5182 +% C = nomvspace + B, go with upper
  5183 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
  5184 +\fi
  5185 +% if violate lower bound, use next integer bound
  5186 +\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightC<\@IEEEquantizeminvspace\relax
  5187 +% A + B = unitheight
  5188 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
  5189 +\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
  5190 +\fi
  5191 +% export object and spacer outside of group
  5192 +\global\let\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax
  5193 +\global\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
  5194 +\endgroup
  5195 +\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg
  5196 +\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg=\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
  5197 +\else
  5198 +\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\relax
  5199 +\vskip\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
  5200 +\fi}
  5201 +
  5202 +
  5203 +% user command to disable all global assignments, possible use within object decl
  5204 +\def\IEEEquantizedisableglobal{\let\global\relax
  5205 +\let\gdef\def
  5206 +\let\xdef\edef}
  5207 +% user command to allow for the disabling of \thanks and other commands, possible use within object decl
  5208 +\def\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds{\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}\relax
  5209 +\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}\def\newpage{\relax}}
  5210 +
  5211 +
  5212 +
  5213 +
  5214 +
  5215 +% V1.6
  5216 +% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
  5217 +% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
  5218 +% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
  5219 +\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
  5220 +\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
  5221 +
  5222 +
  5223 +% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
  5224 +% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
  5225 +% in the dynamic sizer.
  5226 +\let\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext=\relax
  5227 +\long\def\IEEEtitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext{#1}}
  5228 +
  5229 +% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext if
  5230 +% not in compsoc or transmag journal mode - this way abstract and keywords
  5231 +% can still be placed in their conventional position if not in those modes.
  5232 +\def\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext{%
  5233 +% display for all conference formats
  5234 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
  5235 +\else% non-conferences
  5236 + % V1.8a display for all technotes
  5237 + \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
  5238 + % V1.8a add diamond line after abstract and index terms for compsoc technotes
  5239 + \@IEEEcompsoconly{\noindent\hfill\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}\relax
  5240 + \else % non-conferences and non-technotes
  5241 + \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag
  5242 + \else
  5243 + \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
  5244 + \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal
  5245 + \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
  5246 + \fi
  5247 + \fi
  5248 + \fi
  5249 +\fi}
  5250 +
  5251 +
  5252 +% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
  5253 +% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
  5254 +\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
  5255 +\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
  5256 +\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
  5257 +
  5258 +
  5259 +% abstract and keywords are in \small, except
  5260 +% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
  5261 +% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
  5262 +% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
  5263 +\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
  5264 +\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
  5265 + \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
  5266 +\fi
  5267 +
  5268 +% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
  5269 +\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
  5270 +\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}}
  5271 +
  5272 +
  5273 +% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
  5274 +% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
  5275 +\def\abstract{\normalfont
  5276 + \if@twocolumn
  5277 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
  5278 + \else
  5279 + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
  5280 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5281 +% V1.6 The IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in
  5282 +% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
  5283 +\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
  5284 + \normalfont\normalsize}
  5285 +
  5286 +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
  5287 + \if@twocolumn
  5288 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
  5289 + \else
  5290 + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
  5291 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5292 +\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
  5293 + \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
  5294 + \normalfont\normalsize}
  5295 +
  5296 +% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
  5297 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  5298 + \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
  5299 +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
  5300 + \if@twocolumn
  5301 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
  5302 + \else
  5303 + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
  5304 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5305 +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
  5306 + \if@twocolumn
  5307 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
  5308 + \textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
  5309 + \else
  5310 + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
  5311 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5312 + \else% compsoc not conference
  5313 +\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
  5314 + \if@twocolumn
  5315 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
  5316 + \else
  5317 + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
  5318 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5319 +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
  5320 + \if@twocolumn
  5321 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
  5322 + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
  5323 + \else
  5324 + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
  5325 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5326 + \fi
  5327 +\fi
  5328 +
  5329 +% V1.8 transmag keywords index terms
  5330 +% no abstract name, use indentation
  5331 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
  5332 +\def\abstract{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax
  5333 + \if@twocolumn
  5334 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\indent
  5335 + \else
  5336 + \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize
  5337 + \textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
  5338 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5339 +
  5340 +\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax
  5341 + \if@twocolumn
  5342 + \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vspace{1\baselineskip}\bfseries\indent\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
  5343 + \else
  5344 + \bgroup\par\vspace{1\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize
  5345 + \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
  5346 + \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  5347 +\fi
  5348 +
  5349 +
  5350 +
  5351 +% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
  5352 +% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
  5353 +%
  5354 +% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
  5355 +% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
  5356 +% affect the formatting of the text
  5357 +\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
  5358 +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
  5359 +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
  5360 +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
  5361 +\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
  5362 +\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
  5363 +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
  5364 +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
  5365 +\fi%
  5366 +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
  5367 +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
  5368 +\fi%
  5369 +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
  5370 +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
  5371 +\fi%
  5372 +% a control space will come in as a macro
  5373 +% when it is the last one on a line
  5374 +\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
  5375 +\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
  5376 +\fi%
  5377 +% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
  5378 +% else spit it out and stop gobbling
  5379 +\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
  5380 +\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
  5381 +\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
  5382 +
  5383 +
  5384 +
  5385 +
  5386 +% TITLING OF SECTIONS
  5387 +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are
  5388 + % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
  5389 + % spacing from section number to title
  5390 +% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
  5391 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  5392 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  5393 +\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
  5394 +\fi\fi
  5395 +
  5396 +
  5397 +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
  5398 +
  5399 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  5400 +% compsoc journals need extra spacing
  5401 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
  5402 +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
  5403 +\fi\fi
  5404 +
  5405 +%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
  5406 +%and use \@@par rather than \par
  5407 +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
  5408 + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
  5409 + \let\@svsec\@empty
  5410 + \else
  5411 + \refstepcounter{#1}%
  5412 + % load section label and spacer into \@svsec
  5413 + \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
  5414 + \fi%
  5415 + \@tempskipa #5\relax
  5416 + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
  5417 + \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
  5418 + \noindent % subsections are NOT indented
  5419 + % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
  5420 + % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
  5421 + {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
  5422 + \endgroup
  5423 + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
  5424 + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
  5425 + \else % printout low level headings
  5426 + % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
  5427 + % got rid of sectionmark stuff
  5428 + \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
  5429 + \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
  5430 + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
  5431 + \fi%skip down
  5432 + \@xsect{#5}}
  5433 +
  5434 +
  5435 +% section* handler
  5436 +%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
  5437 +%and use \@@par rather than \par
  5438 +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
  5439 + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
  5440 + %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
  5441 + % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
  5442 + \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
  5443 + % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
  5444 + \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
  5445 + \@xsect{#3}}
  5446 +
  5447 +
  5448 +%% SECTION heading spacing and font
  5449 +%%
  5450 +% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
  5451 +% (for \@sect) #2 - section level
  5452 +% #3 - section heading indent
  5453 +% #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
  5454 +% If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
  5455 +% #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
  5456 +% negative: amount to indent main text after heading
  5457 +% Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
  5458 +% #6 - font control
  5459 +% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
  5460 +% trouble when you do something like:
  5461 +% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ...
  5462 +% The IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
  5463 +% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
  5464 +% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
  5465 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
  5466 +% The IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
  5467 +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
  5468 +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
  5469 +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
  5470 +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
  5471 +\else % for journals
  5472 +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
  5473 +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
  5474 +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
  5475 +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
  5476 +\fi
  5477 +
  5478 +% for both journals and conferences
  5479 +% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
  5480 +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
  5481 +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
  5482 +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
  5483 +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
  5484 +
  5485 +
  5486 +% compsoc
  5487 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  5488 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  5489 +% compsoc conference
  5490 +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
  5491 +{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
  5492 +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
  5493 +{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
  5494 +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
  5495 +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
  5496 +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
  5497 +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
  5498 +\else% compsoc journals
  5499 +% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
  5500 +\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
  5501 +{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\sublargesize\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
  5502 +% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
  5503 +% I have to look up an example.
  5504 +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
  5505 +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
  5506 +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
  5507 +{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
  5508 +\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
  5509 +{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
  5510 +\fi\fi
  5511 +
  5512 +% transmag
  5513 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
  5514 +\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{0.75\parindent}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
  5515 +{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
  5516 +\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{1.25\parindent}{0.1ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
  5517 +{0.1ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
  5518 +\fi
  5519 +
  5520 +
  5521 +% V1.8a provide for a raised line Introduction section for use with Computer
  5522 +% Society papers. We have to remove any spacing glue after the section
  5523 +% heading and then remove the blank line for the new paragraph after it.
  5524 +% LaTeX's section handler alters \everypar and we need to propogate those
  5525 +% changes outside of the \parbox lest there be spacing problems at the top
  5526 +% of the next section.
  5527 +\def\IEEEraisesectionheading#1{\noindent\raisebox{1.5\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{#1\unskip\global\everypar=\everypar}}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par}
  5528 +
  5529 +
  5530 +
  5531 +%% ENVIRONMENTS
  5532 +% "box" symbols at end of proofs
  5533 +\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
  5534 +% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
  5535 +\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
  5536 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  5537 +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc
  5538 +\else
  5539 +\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
  5540 +\fi
  5541 +
  5542 +%V1.8 flag to indicate if QED symbol is to be shown
  5543 +\newif\if@IEEEQEDshow \@IEEEQEDshowtrue
  5544 +\def\IEEEproofindentspace{2\parindent}% V1.8 allow user to change indentation amount if desired
  5545 +% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
  5546 +% for an optional argument.
  5547 +\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
  5548 +\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\@IEEEQEDshowtrue\par\noindent\hspace{\IEEEproofindentspace}{\itshape #1: }}
  5549 +\def\endIEEEproof{\if@IEEEQEDshow\hspace*{\fill}\nobreakspace\IEEEQED\fi\par}
  5550 +% qedhere for equation environments, similar to AMS \qedhere
  5551 +\def\IEEEQEDhereeqn{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\eqno\let\eqno\relax\let\leqno\relax
  5552 + \let\veqno\relax\hbox{\IEEEQED}}
  5553 +% IEEE style qedhere for IEEEeqnarray and other environments
  5554 +\def\IEEEQEDhere{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\IEEEQED}
  5555 +% command to disable QED at end of IEEEproof
  5556 +\def\IEEEQEDoff{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse}
  5557 +
  5558 +
  5559 +%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
  5560 +\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
  5561 +
  5562 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  5563 +% V1.8a compsoc uses bold theorem titles, a period instead of a colon, vertical spacing, and hanging indentation
  5564 +% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
  5565 +% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
  5566 +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
  5567 + \topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
  5568 + \rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
  5569 + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2.} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
  5570 +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
  5571 +\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
  5572 +\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
  5573 +% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
  5574 +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
  5575 + \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2\ (#3).} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
  5576 +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
  5577 +% lines below.
  5578 +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\vskip 0.25\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
  5579 +\else
  5580 +%
  5581 +% noncompsoc
  5582 +%
  5583 +% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
  5584 +% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
  5585 +\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
  5586 + \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2:} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
  5587 +\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
  5588 +% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
  5589 +% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
  5590 + \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2\ (#3):} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
  5591 +% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
  5592 +% lines below.
  5593 +\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
  5594 +\fi
  5595 +
  5596 +
  5597 +
  5598 +% V1.6
  5599 +% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
  5600 +% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
  5601 +% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
  5602 +% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
  5603 +% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
  5604 +% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
  5605 +%
  5606 +% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
  5607 +\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
  5608 +% string macro
  5609 +\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
  5610 +
  5611 +% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
  5612 +% if section in_counter is used
  5613 +\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
  5614 + \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
  5615 + {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
  5616 + \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
  5617 + \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
  5618 + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
  5619 + \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
  5620 + \@thmcounter{#1}}%
  5621 + \else
  5622 + \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
  5623 + \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
  5624 + \@thmcounter{#1}}%
  5625 + \fi
  5626 + \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
  5627 + \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
  5628 +
  5629 +
  5630 +
  5631 +%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
  5632 +\pagestyle{headings}
  5633 +\pagenumbering{arabic}
  5634 +
  5635 +% normally the page counter starts at 1
  5636 +\setcounter{page}{1}
  5637 +% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
  5638 +% (for duplex printing)
  5639 +\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
  5640 + \if@twoside
  5641 + \setcounter{page}{-1}
  5642 + \else
  5643 + \setcounter{page}{0}
  5644 + \fi
  5645 +\fi
  5646 +
  5647 +% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
  5648 +% needed when single sided
  5649 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
  5650 +% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
  5651 +% enforce a rigid position for the last lines
  5652 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
  5653 +% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
  5654 + \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
  5655 + \twocolumn
  5656 + \fi
  5657 +\sloppy
  5658 +\flushbottom
  5659 +\fi
  5660 +
  5661 +
  5662 +
  5663 +
  5664 +% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
  5665 +
  5666 +% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
  5667 +% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
  5668 +% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
  5669 +% is present or not.
  5670 +% For instance:
  5671 +% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
  5672 +% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
  5673 +% \appendices is invoked.
  5674 +% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
  5675 +% on whether the user specifies a title:
  5676 +% \section{My appendix title}
  5677 +% or not:
  5678 +% \section{}
  5679 +% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
  5680 +% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
  5681 +% contents
  5682 +\begingroup
  5683 +\catcode`\Q=3
  5684 +\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
  5685 +\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
  5686 +\endgroup
  5687 +% end of \@ifmtarg defs
  5688 +
  5689 +
  5690 +% V1.7
  5691 +% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
  5692 +% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices
  5693 +% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
  5694 +% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
  5695 +\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
  5696 +\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
  5697 +
  5698 +% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
  5699 +% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
  5700 +% argument (title)
  5701 +% note we reroute the call to the old \section*
  5702 +\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
  5703 +\@ifmtarg{#1}{%
  5704 +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis}%
  5705 +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection}}{%
  5706 +\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis\\* #1}%
  5707 +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection: #1}}}
  5708 +
  5709 +% we use this if the user calls \section{} after
  5710 +% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
  5711 +% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
  5712 +\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
  5713 +\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
  5714 +
  5715 +
  5716 +% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
  5717 +% and in the Table of Contents.
  5718 +% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
  5719 +
  5720 +% appendix command for one single appendix
  5721 +% normally has no heading. However, if you want a
  5722 +% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
  5723 +% \appendix[Optional Heading]
  5724 +\def\appendix{\relax}
  5725 +\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
  5726 + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
  5727 + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
  5728 + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
  5729 + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
  5730 + \setcounter{section}{0}%
  5731 + \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
  5732 + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
  5733 + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
  5734 + \gdef\thesection{A}%
  5735 + \gdef\thesectiondis{}%
  5736 + \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
  5737 + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
  5738 + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
  5739 + \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
  5740 + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
  5741 + \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\\* #1}%
  5742 + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
  5743 + % redefine \section command for appendix
  5744 + % leave \section* as is
  5745 + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
  5746 + \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
  5747 + % of the normal form
  5748 +}
  5749 +
  5750 +
  5751 +
  5752 +% appendices command for multiple appendices
  5753 +% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
  5754 +% declare the individual appendices
  5755 +\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
  5756 + % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
  5757 + \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
  5758 + % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
  5759 + \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
  5760 + \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
  5761 + \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
  5762 + \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
  5763 + \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
  5764 + \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
  5765 + \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
  5766 + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
  5767 + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
  5768 + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
  5769 + \else%
  5770 + \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
  5771 + \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
  5772 + \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
  5773 + \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
  5774 + \fi%
  5775 + \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
  5776 + \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
  5777 + % redefine \section command for appendices
  5778 + % leave \section* as is
  5779 + \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
  5780 + \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
  5781 + \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument
  5782 + % of the normal form
  5783 +}
  5784 +
  5785 +
  5786 +
  5787 +% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
  5788 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  5789 + \def\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
  5790 + \def\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
  5791 + \def\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
  5792 +\fi
  5793 +%
  5794 +%
  5795 +% \IEEEPARstart
  5796 +% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
  5797 +% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
  5798 +% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
  5799 +% first word which will be rendered in upper case.
  5800 +% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
  5801 +%
  5802 +% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
  5803 +% within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
  5804 +% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
  5805 +% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
  5806 +% interword glue will now work as normal.
  5807 +% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
  5808 +%
  5809 +% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
  5810 +%
  5811 +% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
  5812 +% to change the font style.
  5813 +%
  5814 +% the number of lines that are indented to clear it
  5815 +% may need to increase if using decenders
  5816 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES}{2}
  5817 +% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
  5818 +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
  5819 +% be overly cautious
  5820 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES}{2}
  5821 +% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
  5822 +% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
  5823 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}{T}
  5824 +% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
  5825 +% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
  5826 +% of this value and the height of the \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
  5827 +% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
  5828 +% so that it can respond to changes therein.
  5829 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}{1.1\baselineskip}
  5830 +% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
  5831 +% can take zero or one argument.
  5832 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE}{\bfseries}
  5833 +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
  5834 +% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
  5835 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase}
  5836 +% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
  5837 +% can take zero or one argument.
  5838 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE}{\relax}
  5839 +% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
  5840 +% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
  5841 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase}
  5842 +% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
  5843 +% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
  5844 +% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called.
  5845 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartSEP}{0.15em}
  5846 +% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
  5847 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}{0em}
  5848 +% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
  5849 +\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}{\/}
  5850 +
  5851 +% width of the letter output, set globally. Can be used in \IEEEPARstartSEP
  5852 +% or \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET, but not the height lengths.
  5853 +\newdimen\IEEEPARstartletwidth
  5854 +\IEEEPARstartletwidth 0pt\relax
  5855 +
  5856 +% definition of \IEEEPARstart
  5857 +% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
  5858 +%
  5859 +% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
  5860 +% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
  5861 +% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
  5862 +% argument is the rest of the first word(s).
  5863 +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
  5864 +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
  5865 +% on a new one
  5866 +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
  5867 +% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
  5868 +% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
  5869 +\noindent
  5870 +% calculate the desired height of the big letter
  5871 +% it extends from the top of \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
  5872 +% down to \IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
  5873 +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
  5874 +\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
  5875 +% extract the name of the current font in bold
  5876 +% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
  5877 +\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
  5878 +{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
  5879 +\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
  5880 +% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
  5881 +% height of the drop letter
  5882 +\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
  5883 +% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
  5884 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
  5885 +% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
  5886 +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
  5887 +% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
  5888 +% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
  5889 +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
  5890 +\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
  5891 +\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
  5892 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
  5893 +\fi%
  5894 +% and store it as a counter
  5895 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
  5896 +% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
  5897 +% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
  5898 +% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
  5899 +% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  5900 +% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
  5901 +% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
  5902 +% division. Hence the use of the counters.
  5903 +% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
  5904 +% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
  5905 +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
  5906 +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
  5907 +% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
  5908 +% floating point values
  5909 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
  5910 +\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
  5911 +% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
  5912 +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
  5913 +% big letter.
  5914 +\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
  5915 +% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
  5916 +% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
  5917 +% hanging indent
  5918 +\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
  5919 +\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
  5920 +% end of the isolated calculation environment
  5921 +\global\IEEEPARstartletwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
  5922 +% add in the extra clearance we want
  5923 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
  5924 +% add in the optional offset
  5925 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
  5926 +% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
  5927 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  5928 +\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
  5929 +% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
  5930 +% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
  5931 +% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
  5932 +% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
  5933 +% text won't be displaced by it.
  5934 +\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
  5935 +\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
  5936 +\raisebox{-\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
  5937 +\@IEEEPARstartfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
  5938 +\hspace{\IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
  5939 +{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
  5940 +
  5941 +
  5942 +
  5943 +
  5944 +% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
  5945 +% than the specified space of argument one
  5946 +% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
  5947 +% and issue a \newpage
  5948 +%
  5949 +% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
  5950 +%
  5951 +% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
  5952 +% be overly cautious
  5953 +% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
  5954 +% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
  5955 +% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
  5956 +% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
  5957 +\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
  5958 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
  5959 +\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
  5960 +\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
  5961 +\newpage%
  5962 +\fi\endgroup}
  5963 +
  5964 +
  5965 +
  5966 +% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
  5967 +% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
  5968 +% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
  5969 +% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a
  5970 +% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
  5971 +% MDS 7/2001
  5972 +% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
  5973 +\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
  5974 +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
  5975 +
  5976 +% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
  5977 +% and not just the previous section
  5978 +\newcounter{IEEEbiography}
  5979 +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
  5980 +
  5981 +% photo area size
  5982 +\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area
  5983 +\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area
  5984 +% area cleared for photo
  5985 +\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area
  5986 +\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area
  5987 + % actual depth will be a multiple of
  5988 + % \baselineskip, rounded up
  5989 +\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
  5990 +
  5991 +\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
  5992 +\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
  5993 +% we need enough space to support the hanging indent
  5994 +% the nominal value of the spacer
  5995 +% and one extra line for good measure
  5996 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
  5997 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
  5998 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
  5999 +% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
  6000 +% with a new one
  6001 +\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
  6002 +% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
  6003 +\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
  6004 +% the default box for where the photo goes
  6005 +\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
  6006 +\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
  6007 +%
  6008 +% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
  6009 +% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
  6010 +% and if so, override the default box with what they want
  6011 +\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
  6012 +\centering%
  6013 +#1%
  6014 +\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
  6015 +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
  6016 +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
  6017 +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
  6018 +% to the biography, not the previous section
  6019 +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
  6020 +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
  6021 +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
  6022 +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
  6023 +\fi%
  6024 +% one more biography
  6025 +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
  6026 +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
  6027 +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
  6028 +% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
  6029 +% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
  6030 +% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
  6031 +% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
  6032 +\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
  6033 +\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
  6034 +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
  6035 +\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
  6036 +\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
  6037 +\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
  6038 +\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
  6039 +% set the hanging indent
  6040 +\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
  6041 +\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
  6042 +% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
  6043 +\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
  6044 +% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
  6045 +\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
  6046 +\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
  6047 +% now place the author name and begin the bio text
  6048 +\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
  6049 +% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
  6050 +% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
  6051 +% MDS
  6052 +\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
  6053 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
  6054 + \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
  6055 + \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
  6056 + \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
  6057 + \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
  6058 +\fi%
  6059 +\par\normalfont}
  6060 +
  6061 +
  6062 +
  6063 +% V1.6
  6064 +% added biography without a photo environment
  6065 +\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
  6066 +% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
  6067 +\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
  6068 +% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
  6069 +% to the biography, not the previous section
  6070 +\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
  6071 +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
  6072 +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
  6073 +\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
  6074 +\fi%
  6075 +% one more biography
  6076 +\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
  6077 +% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents
  6078 +\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
  6079 +\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
  6080 +\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
  6081 +\parskip=0pt\par%
  6082 +\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
  6083 +
  6084 +
  6085 +% provide the user with some old font commands
  6086 +% got this from article.cls
  6087 +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
  6088 +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
  6089 +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
  6090 +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
  6091 +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
  6092 +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
  6093 +\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
  6094 +\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
  6095 +\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
  6096 +
  6097 +
  6098 +% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
  6099 +%
  6100 +% holds the special notice text
  6101 +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
  6102 +
  6103 +% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
  6104 +% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
  6105 +\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
  6106 +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
  6107 +\else%
  6108 +\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
  6109 +\fi}
  6110 +
  6111 +
  6112 +
  6113 +
  6114 +% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
  6115 +% to insert a publisher's ID footer
  6116 +% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
  6117 +% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
  6118 +% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
  6119 +% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
  6120 +% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author
  6121 +% names and the maintext.
  6122 +%
  6123 +% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
  6124 +% publisher's ID footer
  6125 +% The IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals,
  6126 +% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
  6127 +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
  6128 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
  6129 +% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
  6130 +% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
  6131 +% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
  6132 +% second column
  6133 +% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
  6134 +% Information Theory") in which the IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
  6135 +% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
  6136 +% and call it even.
  6137 +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
  6138 +\fi
  6139 +
  6140 +% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
  6141 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  6142 +\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
  6143 +\fi
  6144 +
  6145 +% holds the ID text
  6146 +\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
  6147 +
  6148 +% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
  6149 +\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
  6150 +\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
  6151 +% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
  6152 +% V1.6 use before \maketitle
  6153 +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
  6154 +
  6155 +
  6156 +% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
  6157 +% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
  6158 +% the title page when using \IEEEpubid
  6159 +% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
  6160 +% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
  6161 +% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
  6162 +% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
  6163 +% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
  6164 +% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been
  6165 +% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
  6166 +% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
  6167 +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
  6168 +\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
  6169 +
  6170 +% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
  6171 +% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
  6172 +% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
  6173 +
  6174 +
  6175 +
  6176 +%% Lockout some commands under various conditions
  6177 +
  6178 +% general purpose bit bucket
  6179 +\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
  6180 +
  6181 +% flags to prevent multiple warning messages
  6182 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
  6183 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
  6184 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
  6185 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
  6186 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
  6187 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
  6188 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
  6189 +\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
  6190 +\@IEEEWARNthankstrue
  6191 +\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
  6192 +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
  6193 +\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
  6194 +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
  6195 +\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
  6196 +\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
  6197 +\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
  6198 +
  6199 +
  6200 +%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
  6201 +%%
  6202 +% save commands which might be locked out
  6203 +% so that the user can later restore them if needed
  6204 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
  6205 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
  6206 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
  6207 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
  6208 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
  6209 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
  6210 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
  6211 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
  6212 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
  6213 +\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
  6214 +
  6215 +
  6216 +% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
  6217 +% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
  6218 +% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
  6219 +% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
  6220 +% paper.
  6221 +\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  6222 +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
  6223 + is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
  6224 +\fi
  6225 +% and for technotes
  6226 +\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
  6227 +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
  6228 + is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
  6229 +\fi
  6230 +
  6231 +
  6232 +% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
  6233 +\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  6234 +% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
  6235 +% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text.
  6236 +% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
  6237 +% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
  6238 +% from filling up with redundant messages
  6239 +\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
  6240 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
  6241 +\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
  6242 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
  6243 +
  6244 +
  6245 +% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
  6246 +% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname
  6247 +% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
  6248 +% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
  6249 +% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the
  6250 +% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
  6251 +% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
  6252 +% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
  6253 +% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
  6254 +% name can be left undisturbed.
  6255 +\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
  6256 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
  6257 +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
  6258 +% and make biography point to our bogus biography
  6259 +\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
  6260 +\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
  6261 +
  6262 +\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
  6263 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
  6264 +\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
  6265 +
  6266 +\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid
  6267 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
  6268 +\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
  6269 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
  6270 +\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
  6271 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
  6272 +\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
  6273 + is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
  6274 +\fi
  6275 +
  6276 +
  6277 +% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
  6278 +\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
  6279 +\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
  6280 +\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
  6281 +\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
  6282 +\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
  6283 +\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
  6284 +\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
  6285 +\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
  6286 +\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
  6287 +\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
  6288 +\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
  6289 +\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
  6290 +
  6291 +
  6292 +
  6293 +% need a backslash character for typeout output
  6294 +{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
  6295 +|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
  6296 +
  6297 +
  6298 +% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
  6299 +\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
  6300 +Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
  6301 +
  6302 +
  6303 +% provide some legacy IEEEtran commands
  6304 +\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\IEEEtitleabstractindextext}
  6305 +\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}
  6306 +% provide some legacy IEEEtran environments
  6307 +
  6308 +
  6309 +% V1.8a no more support for these legacy commands
  6310 +%\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
  6311 +%\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
  6312 +%\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
  6313 +%\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
  6314 +%\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
  6315 +%\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
  6316 +%\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
  6317 +% and environments
  6318 +%\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
  6319 +%\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
  6320 +% V1.8 no more support for legacy IED list commands
  6321 +%\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
  6322 +%\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
  6323 +%\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
  6324 +%\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
  6325 +%\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
  6326 +%\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
  6327 +%\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
  6328 +% V1.8 no more support for QED and proof stuff
  6329 +%\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
  6330 +%\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
  6331 +%\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
  6332 +%\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
  6333 +% V1.8 no longer support biography or biographynophoto
  6334 +%\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
  6335 +%\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
  6336 +%\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
  6337 +%\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
  6338 +% V1.7 and later no longer supports \overrideIEEEmargins
  6339 +%\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
  6340 +%\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
  6341 +%\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
  6342 +
  6343 +\endinput
  6344 +
  6345 +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
  6346 +% That's all folks!
  6347 +
... ...
IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf 0 → 100644
No preview for this file type
README 0 → 100644
  1 +++ a/README
  1 +
  2 +August 26, 2015
  3 +
  4 +
  5 +IEEEtran is a LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of Electrical and
  6 +Electronics Engineers (IEEE) transactions journals and conferences.
  7 +The latest version of the IEEEtran package can be found at CTAN:
  8 +
  9 +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran
  10 +
  11 +as well as within IEEE's site:
  12 +
  13 +http://www.ieee.org/
  14 +
  15 +
  16 +This package contains the IEEE Computer Society subset of the full IEEEtran
  17 +package and is intended for use with IEEE Computer Society publications.
  18 +The included version of the IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf has been specially formatted
  19 +in IEEE Computer Society (compsoc) journal mode.
  20 +
  21 +
  22 +For latest news, helpful tips, answers to frequently asked questions,
  23 +beta releases and other support, visit the IEEEtran home page at my
  24 +website:
  25 +
  26 +http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
  27 +
  28 +Version 1.8b has a number of significant changes over the v1.8a release.
  29 +For a full history of changes, please read the file changelog.txt.
  30 +The most notable changes in this release include:
  31 +
  32 + 1) Added new comsoc mode for the IEEE Communications Society.
  33 + This mode (at present) only invokes the use of the newtxmath math fonts.
  34 +
  35 + 2) Revised IEEEeqnarray column specifications to work with active "
  36 + (or other punctuation catcode changes) as with babel under the
  37 + german or ngerman language modes.
  38 + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem.
  39 +
  40 + 3) Added \indexspace and other index related macros as newer versions of
  41 + article.cls now do. These macros are needed to avoid an error when
  42 + using the glossaries package.
  43 + Thanks to Sebastian Nyberg for suggesting this change.
  44 +
  45 + 4) Fixed odd/even page header font bug under compsoc mode and
  46 + other page style code improvements.
  47 + Thanks to Marco Paolieri for reporting this problem.
  48 +
  49 + 5) Added hooks to allow for easy control of spacing above title.
  50 +
  51 + 6) Added the \IEEEnoauxwrite command.
  52 + Thanks to Sudarshan Mukherjee for suggesting this feature.
  53 +
  54 +
  55 +NOTE: Take care not to confuse the "comsoc" and "compsoc" class
  56 +options/modes as they are very different:
  57 +
  58 +comsoc ==> IEEE Communications Society
  59 +compsoc ==> IEEE Computer Society
  60 +
  61 +The comsoc mode requires that an acceptable Times math font be available on
  62 +the LaTeX system. This requirement will be enforced by IEEEtran in comsoc
  63 +mode. Either the freely available newtxmath font by Michael Sharpe
  64 +http://www.ctan.org/pkg/newtx
  65 +(version 1.451, July 28, 2015 or later is recommended)
  66 +or the commercial MathTime font (e.g., mtpro2.sty) is acceptable.
  67 +See Section II-D (2.4) "Class Options - comsoc, compsoc, transmag" of
  68 +the IEEEtran HOWTO for more details.
  69 +
  70 +
  71 +Best wishes for all your publication endeavors,
  72 +
  73 +Michael Shell
  74 +http://www.michaelshell.org/
  75 +
  76 +
  77 +********************************** Files **********************************
  78 +
  79 +README - This file.
  80 +
  81 +IEEEtran.cls - The IEEEtran LaTeX class file.
  82 +
  83 +changelog.txt - The revision history.
  84 +
  85 +IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf - The IEEEtran LaTeX class user manual.
  86 +
  87 +bare_conf_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Computer Society
  88 + conference papers.
  89 +
  90 +bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex - A bare bones starter file for IEEE Computer Society
  91 + journal papers.
  92 +
  93 +bare_adv.tex - A bare bones starter file showing advanced
  94 + techniques such as conditional compilation,
  95 + hyperlinks, PDF thumbnails, etc. The illustrated
  96 + format is for a IEEE Computer Society journal paper.
  97 +
  98 +***************************************************************************
  99 +Legal Notice:
  100 +This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
  101 +implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
  102 +FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
  103 +User assumes all risk.
  104 +In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
  105 +any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
  106 +consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
  107 +of any information contained here.
  108 +
  109 +All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
  110 +necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
  111 +
  112 +This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
  113 +( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
  114 +distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
  115 +in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
  116 +2003/12/01 or later.
  117 +Retain all contribution notices and credits.
  118 +** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
  119 +** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
  120 +
  121 +File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
  122 + bare_conf_compsoc.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex.
  123 +***************************************************************************
... ...
bare_adv.tex 0 → 100644
  1 +++ a/bare_adv.tex
  1 +
  2 +%% bare_adv.tex
  3 +%% V1.4b
  4 +%% 2015/08/26
  5 +%% by Michael Shell
  6 +%% See:
  7 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
  8 +%% for current contact information.
  9 +%%
  10 +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the advanced use of IEEEtran.cls
  11 +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE Computer
  12 +%% Society journal paper.
  13 +%%
  14 +%% Support sites:
  15 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
  16 +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran
  17 +%% and
  18 +%% http://www.ieee.org/
  19 +
  20 +%%*************************************************************************
  21 +%% Legal Notice:
  22 +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
  23 +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
  24 +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
  25 +%% User assumes all risk.
  26 +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
  27 +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
  28 +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
  29 +%% of any information contained here.
  30 +%%
  31 +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
  32 +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
  33 +%%
  34 +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
  35 +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
  36 +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
  37 +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
  38 +%% 2003/12/01 or later.
  39 +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
  40 +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
  41 +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
  42 +%%*************************************************************************
  43 +
  44 +
  45 +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system ***
  46 +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
  47 +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can ***
  48 +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** ***
  49 +% The testflow support page is at:
  50 +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
  51 +
  52 +
  53 +% IEEEtran V1.7 and later provides for these CLASSINPUT macros to allow the
  54 +% user to reprogram some IEEEtran.cls defaults if needed. These settings
  55 +% override the internal defaults of IEEEtran.cls regardless of which class
  56 +% options are used. Do not use these unless you have good reason to do so as
  57 +% they can result in nonIEEE compliant documents. User beware. ;)
  58 +%
  59 +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch}{1.0} % baselinestretch
  60 +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{1in} % inner side margin
  61 +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{1in} % outer side margin
  62 +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{1in} % top text margin
  63 +%\newcommand{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}{1in}% bottom text margin
  64 +
  65 +
  66 +
  67 +
  68 +%
  69 +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
  70 +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
  71 +% manually specify the path to it like:
  72 +% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran}
  73 +
  74 +
  75 +% For Computer Society journals, IEEEtran defaults to the use of
  76 +% Palatino/Palladio as is done in IEEE Computer Society journals.
  77 +% To go back to Times Roman, you can use this code:
  78 +%\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}\selectfont
  79 +
  80 +
  81 +
  82 +
  83 +
  84 +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include:
  85 +% (uncomment the ones you want to load)
  86 +
  87 +
  88 +
  89 +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES ***
  90 +%
  91 +%\usepackage{ifpdf}
  92 +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional
  93 +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi.
  94 +% usage:
  95 +% \ifpdf
  96 +% % pdf code
  97 +% \else
  98 +% % dvi code
  99 +% \fi
  100 +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from:
  101 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf
  102 +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin
  103 +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way.
  104 +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may
  105 +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages.
  106 +
  107 +
  108 +
  109 +
  110 +
  111 +
  112 +% *** CITATION PACKAGES ***
  113 +%
  114 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  115 + % The IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option
  116 + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003)
  117 + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
  118 +\else
  119 + % normal IEEE
  120 + \usepackage{cite}
  121 +\fi
  122 +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau
  123 +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package
  124 +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will
  125 +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly
  126 +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using
  127 +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's
  128 +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's
  129 +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
  130 +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
  131 +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
  132 +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
  133 +% The latest version can be obtained at:
  134 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite
  135 +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
  136 +%
  137 +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer
  138 +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use
  139 +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers
  140 +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order
  141 +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite
  142 +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0
  143 +% and later.
  144 +
  145 +
  146 +
  147 +
  148 +
  149 +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES ***
  150 +%
  151 +\ifCLASSINFOpdf
  152 + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
  153 + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
  154 + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}}
  155 + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
  156 + % every instance of \includegraphics
  157 + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png}
  158 +\else
  159 + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx
  160 + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no
  161 + % driver is specified.
  162 + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}
  163 + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
  164 + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}}
  165 + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
  166 + % every instance of \includegraphics
  167 + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps}
  168 +\fi
  169 +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is
  170 +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already
  171 +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation
  172 +% can be obtained at:
  173 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx
  174 +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in
  175 +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at:
  176 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex
  177 +%
  178 +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated
  179 +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics
  180 +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure
  181 +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and
  182 +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats
  183 +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as
  184 +% well as large increases in file sizes.
  185 +%
  186 +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at:
  187 +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex
  188 +
  189 +
  190 +
  191 +
  192 +
  193 +% *** MATH PACKAGES ***
  194 +%
  195 +%\usepackage{amsmath}
  196 +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides
  197 +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics.
  198 +%
  199 +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000
  200 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use:
  201 +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
  202 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally
  203 +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest
  204 +% version and documentation can be obtained at:
  205 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath
  206 +
  207 +
  208 +
  209 +
  210 +
  211 +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES ***
  212 +%\usepackage{acronym}
  213 +% acronym.sty was written by Tobias Oetiker. This package provides tools for
  214 +% managing documents with large numbers of acronyms. (You don't *have* to
  215 +% use this package - unless you have a lot of acronyms, you may feel that
  216 +% such package management of them is bit of an overkill.)
  217 +% Do note that the acronym environment (which lists acronyms) will have a
  218 +% problem when used under IEEEtran.cls because acronym.sty relies on the
  219 +% description list environment - which IEEEtran.cls has customized for
  220 +% producing IEEE style lists. A workaround is to declared the longest
  221 +% label width via the IEEEtran.cls \IEEEiedlistdecl global control:
  222 +%
  223 +% \renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\IEEEsetlabelwidth{SONET}}
  224 +% \begin{acronym}
  225 +%
  226 +% \end{acronym}
  227 +% \renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\relax}% remember to reset \IEEEiedlistdecl
  228 +%
  229 +% instead of using the acronym environment's optional argument.
  230 +% The latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
  231 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/acronym
  232 +
  233 +
  234 +%\usepackage{algorithmic}
  235 +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito.
  236 +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms.
  237 +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure
  238 +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm
  239 +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or
  240 +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated
  241 +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide
  242 +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of
  243 +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at:
  244 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms
  245 +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable)
  246 +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos:
  247 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx
  248 +
  249 +
  250 +
  251 +
  252 +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES ***
  253 +%
  254 +%\usepackage{array}
  255 +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves
  256 +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better
  257 +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table
  258 +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with
  259 +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly
  260 +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty)
  261 +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The
  262 +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
  263 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array
  264 +
  265 +
  266 +%\usepackage{mdwmath}
  267 +%\usepackage{mdwtab}
  268 +% Also highly recommended is Mark Wooding's extremely powerful MDW tools,
  269 +% especially mdwmath.sty and mdwtab.sty which are used to format equations
  270 +% and tables, respectively. The MDWtools set is already installed on most
  271 +% LaTeX systems. The lastest version and documentation is available at:
  272 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/mdwtools
  273 +
  274 +
  275 +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to
  276 +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high
  277 +% quality.
  278 +
  279 +
  280 +%\usepackage{eqparbox}
  281 +% Also of notable interest is Scott Pakin's eqparbox package for creating
  282 +% (automatically sized) equal width boxes - aka "natural width parboxes".
  283 +% Available at:
  284 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/eqparbox
  285 +
  286 +
  287 +
  288 +
  289 +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES ***
  290 +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  291 +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
  292 +%\else
  293 +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig}
  294 +%\fi
  295 +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement
  296 +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is
  297 +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However,
  298 +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty
  299 +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result
  300 +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure
  301 +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since
  302 +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls
  303 +% handling of captions.
  304 +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather
  305 +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need
  306 +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether
  307 +% compsoc mode has been enabled.
  308 +%
  309 +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at:
  310 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig
  311 +
  312 +
  313 +
  314 +
  315 +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES ***
  316 +%
  317 +%\usepackage{fixltx2e}
  318 +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by
  319 +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems
  320 +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current
  321 +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not
  322 +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a
  323 +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column
  324 +% figure.
  325 +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's
  326 +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will
  327 +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer
  328 +% needed.
  329 +% The latest version and documentation can be found at:
  330 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e
  331 +
  332 +
  333 +%\usepackage{stfloats}
  334 +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e
  335 +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well
  336 +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in
  337 +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command:
  338 +%\fnbelowfloat
  339 +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard
  340 +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package
  341 +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work
  342 +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest
  343 +% version and documentation can be obtained at:
  344 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats
  345 +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow
  346 +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note
  347 +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try
  348 +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty
  349 +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in
  350 +% such ways.
  351 +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible.
  352 +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features
  353 +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats:
  354 +%
  355 +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix}
  356 +% The latest version can be found at:
  357 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix
  358 +
  359 +
  360 +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
  361 +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat}
  362 +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption
  363 +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}}
  364 +%\fi
  365 +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and
  366 +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with
  367 +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that
  368 +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that
  369 +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at
  370 +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or
  371 +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line
  372 +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to
  373 +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed
  374 +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of
  375 +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that
  376 +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if
  377 +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}.
  378 +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument,
  379 +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable
  380 +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off
  381 +% the subcaptions:
  382 +% For subfig.sty:
  383 +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat
  384 +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}}
  385 +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of
  386 +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a
  387 +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add
  388 +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to
  389 +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway)
  390 +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption.
  391 +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at:
  392 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat
  393 +%
  394 +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used
  395 +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a
  396 +% page by themselves.
  397 +
  398 +
  399 +
  400 +
  401 +
  402 +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES ***
  403 +%
  404 +%\usepackage{url}
  405 +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for
  406 +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX
  407 +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
  408 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url
  409 +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}.
  410 +
  411 +
  412 +% NOTE: PDF thumbnail features are not required in IEEE papers
  413 +% and their use requires extra complexity and work.
  414 +%\ifCLASSINFOpdf
  415 +% \usepackage[pdftex]{thumbpdf}
  416 +%\else
  417 +% \usepackage[dvips]{thumbpdf}
  418 +%\fi
  419 +% thumbpdf.sty and its companion Perl utility were written by Heiko Oberdiek.
  420 +% It allows the user a way to produce PDF documents that contain fancy
  421 +% thumbnail images of each of the pages (which tools like acrobat reader can
  422 +% utilize). This is possible even when using dvi->ps->pdf workflow if the
  423 +% correct thumbpdf driver options are used. thumbpdf.sty incorporates the
  424 +% file containing the PDF thumbnail information (filename.tpm is used with
  425 +% dvips, filename.tpt is used with pdftex, where filename is the base name of
  426 +% your tex document) into the final ps or pdf output document. An external
  427 +% utility, the thumbpdf *Perl script* is needed to make these .tpm or .tpt
  428 +% thumbnail files from a .ps or .pdf version of the document (which obviously
  429 +% does not yet contain pdf thumbnails). Thus, one does a:
  430 +%
  431 +% thumbpdf filename.pdf
  432 +%
  433 +% to make a filename.tpt, and:
  434 +%
  435 +% thumbpdf --mode dvips filename.ps
  436 +%
  437 +% to make a filename.tpm which will then be loaded into the document by
  438 +% thumbpdf.sty the NEXT time the document is compiled (by pdflatex or
  439 +% latex->dvips->ps2pdf). Users must be careful to regenerate the .tpt and/or
  440 +% .tpm files if the main document changes and then to recompile the
  441 +% document to incorporate the revised thumbnails to ensure that thumbnails
  442 +% match the actual pages. It is easy to forget to do this!
  443 +%
  444 +% Unix systems come with a Perl interpreter. However, MS Windows users
  445 +% will usually have to install a Perl interpreter so that the thumbpdf
  446 +% script can be run. The Ghostscript PS/PDF interpreter is also required.
  447 +% See the thumbpdf docs for details. The latest version and documentation
  448 +% can be obtained at.
  449 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/thumbpdf
  450 +
  451 +
  452 +% NOTE: PDF hyperlink and bookmark features are not required in IEEE
  453 +% papers and their use requires extra complexity and work.
  454 +% *** IF USING HYPERREF BE SURE AND CHANGE THE EXAMPLE PDF ***
  455 +% *** TITLE/SUBJECT/AUTHOR/KEYWORDS INFO BELOW!! ***
  456 +\newcommand\MYhyperrefoptions{bookmarks=true,bookmarksnumbered=true,
  457 +pdfpagemode={UseOutlines},plainpages=false,pdfpagelabels=true,
  458 +colorlinks=true,linkcolor={black},citecolor={black},urlcolor={black},
  459 +pdftitle={Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals},%<!CHANGE!
  460 +pdfsubject={Typesetting},%<!CHANGE!
  461 +pdfauthor={Michael D. Shell},%<!CHANGE!
  462 +pdfkeywords={Computer Society, IEEEtran, journal, LaTeX, paper,
  463 + template}}%<^!CHANGE!
  464 +%\ifCLASSINFOpdf
  465 +%\usepackage[\MYhyperrefoptions,pdftex]{hyperref}
  466 +%\else
  467 +%\usepackage[\MYhyperrefoptions,breaklinks=true,dvips]{hyperref}
  468 +%\usepackage{breakurl}
  469 +%\fi
  470 +% One significant drawback of using hyperref under DVI output is that the
  471 +% LaTeX compiler cannot break URLs across lines or pages as can be done
  472 +% under pdfLaTeX's PDF output via the hyperref pdftex driver. This is
  473 +% probably the single most important capability distinction between the
  474 +% DVI and PDF output. Perhaps surprisingly, all the other PDF features
  475 +% (PDF bookmarks, thumbnails, etc.) can be preserved in
  476 +% .tex->.dvi->.ps->.pdf workflow if the respective packages/scripts are
  477 +% loaded/invoked with the correct driver options (dvips, etc.).
  478 +% As most IEEE papers use URLs sparingly (mainly in the references), this
  479 +% may not be as big an issue as with other publications.
  480 +%
  481 +% That said, Vilar Camara Neto created his breakurl.sty package which
  482 +% permits hyperref to easily break URLs even in dvi mode.
  483 +% Note that breakurl, unlike most other packages, must be loaded
  484 +% AFTER hyperref. The latest version of breakurl and its documentation can
  485 +% be obtained at:
  486 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/breakurl
  487 +% breakurl.sty is not for use under pdflatex pdf mode.
  488 +%
  489 +% The advanced features offer by hyperref.sty are not required for IEEE
  490 +% submission, so users should weigh these features against the added
  491 +% complexity of use.
  492 +% The package options above demonstrate how to enable PDF bookmarks
  493 +% (a type of table of contents viewable in Acrobat Reader) as well as
  494 +% PDF document information (title, subject, author and keywords) that is
  495 +% viewable in Acrobat reader's Document_Properties menu. PDF document
  496 +% information is also used extensively to automate the cataloging of PDF
  497 +% documents. The above set of options ensures that hyperlinks will not be
  498 +% colored in the text and thus will not be visible in the printed page,
  499 +% but will be active on "mouse over". USING COLORS OR OTHER HIGHLIGHTING
  500 +% OF HYPERLINKS CAN RESULT IN DOCUMENT REJECTION BY THE IEEE, especially if
  501 +% these appear on the "printed" page. IF IN DOUBT, ASK THE RELEVANT
  502 +% SUBMISSION EDITOR. You may need to add the option hypertexnames=false if
  503 +% you used duplicate equation numbers, etc., but this should not be needed
  504 +% in normal IEEE work.
  505 +% The latest version of hyperref and its documentation can be obtained at:
  506 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
  507 +
  508 +
  509 +
  510 +
  511 +
  512 +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. ***
  513 +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). ***
  514 +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later.
  515 +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan
  516 +% to submit to, of course. )
  517 +
  518 +
  519 +% correct bad hyphenation here
  520 +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor}
  521 +
  522 +
  523 +\begin{document}
  524 +%
  525 +% paper title
  526 +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
  527 +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
  528 +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
  529 +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
  530 +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
  531 +\title{Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Journals}
  532 +%
  533 +%
  534 +% author names and IEEE memberships
  535 +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break
  536 +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across
  537 +% two lines.
  538 +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area
  539 +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks
  540 +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs
  541 +%
  542 +%
  543 +%\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks is a special \thanks that produces the bulleted
  544 +% lists the Computer Society journals use for "first footnote" author
  545 +% affiliations. Use \IEEEcompsocthanksitem which works much like \item
  546 +% for each affiliation group. When not in compsoc mode,
  547 +% \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks becomes like \thanks and
  548 +% \IEEEcompsocthanksitem becomes a line break with idention. This
  549 +% facilitates dual compilation, although admittedly the differences in the
  550 +% desired content of \author between the different types of papers makes a
  551 +% one-size-fits-all approach a daunting prospect. For instance, compsoc
  552 +% journal papers have the author affiliations above the "Manuscript
  553 +% received ..." text while in non-compsoc journals this is reversed. Sigh.
  554 +
  555 +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,}
  556 + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,}
  557 + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space
  558 +\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem M. Shell was with the Department
  559 +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta,
  560 +GA, 30332.\protect\\
  561 +% note need leading \protect in front of \\ to get a newline within \thanks as
  562 +% \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead.
  563 +E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
  564 +\IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops a space
  565 +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}}
  566 +
  567 +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks -
  568 +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name
  569 +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this:
  570 +%
  571 +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} }
  572 +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces!
  573 +%
  574 +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that
  575 +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For
  576 +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get
  577 +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}"
  578 +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks
  579 +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks.
  580 +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as
  581 +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth,
  582 +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil
  583 +% space somehow managed to creep in.
  584 +
  585 +
  586 +
  587 +% The paper headers
  588 +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}%
  589 +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Advanced Demo of IEEEtran.cls for IEEE Computer Society Journals}
  590 +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages
  591 +% after the title page when using the twoside option.
  592 +%
  593 +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's ***
  594 +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. ***
  595 +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if
  596 +% you desire.
  597 +
  598 +
  599 +
  600 +% The publisher's ID mark at the bottom of the page is less important with
  601 +% Computer Society journal papers as those publications place the marks
  602 +% outside of the main text columns and, therefore, unlike regular IEEE
  603 +% journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence.
  604 +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like
  605 +% this:
  606 +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}
  607 +% or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style.
  608 +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}%
  609 +%\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}}
  610 +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second
  611 +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society journal
  612 +% papers don't need this extra clearance.)
  613 +
  614 +
  615 +
  616 +% use for special paper notices
  617 +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)}
  618 +
  619 +
  620 +
  621 +% for Computer Society papers, we must declare the abstract and index terms
  622 +% PRIOR to the title within the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext IEEEtran
  623 +% command as these need to go into the title area created by \maketitle.
  624 +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations
  625 +% in the abstract or keywords.
  626 +\IEEEtitleabstractindextext{%
  627 +\begin{abstract}
  628 +The abstract goes here.
  629 +\end{abstract}
  630 +
  631 +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers.
  632 +\begin{IEEEkeywords}
  633 +Computer Society, IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template.
  634 +\end{IEEEkeywords}}
  635 +
  636 +
  637 +% make the title area
  638 +\maketitle
  639 +
  640 +
  641 +% To allow for easy dual compilation without having to reenter the
  642 +% abstract/keywords data, the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext text will
  643 +% not be used in maketitle, but will appear (i.e., to be "transported")
  644 +% here as \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext when compsoc mode
  645 +% is not selected <OR> if conference mode is selected - because compsoc
  646 +% conference papers position the abstract like regular (non-compsoc)
  647 +% papers do!
  648 +\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext
  649 +% \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext has no effect when using
  650 +% compsoc under a non-conference mode.
  651 +
  652 +
  653 +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover
  654 +% page as needed:
  655 +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
  656 +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center}
  657 +% \fi
  658 +%
  659 +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and
  660 +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes.
  661 +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle
  662 +
  663 +
  664 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  665 +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}}
  666 +\else
  667 +\section{Introduction}
  668 +\label{sec:introduction}
  669 +\fi
  670 +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual
  671 +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction").
  672 +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do
  673 +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided
  674 +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that
  675 +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as
  676 +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box.
  677 +
  678 +
  679 +
  680 +
  681 +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed
  682 +% by the rest of the first word in caps (small caps for compsoc).
  683 +%
  684 +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter:
  685 +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is ....
  686 +%
  687 +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by
  688 +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE):
  689 +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is ....
  690 +%
  691 +% Some journals put the first two words in caps:
  692 +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is ....
  693 +%
  694 +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter
  695 +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word.
  696 +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
  697 +for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
  698 +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later.
  699 +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
  700 +% (should never be an issue)
  701 +I wish you the best of success.
  702 +
  703 +\hfill mds
  704 +
  705 +\hfill August 26, 2015
  706 +
  707 +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
  708 +Subsection text here.
  709 +
  710 +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid
  711 +%\IEEEpubidadjcol
  712 +
  713 +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here}
  714 +Subsubsection text here.
  715 +
  716 +
  717 +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package.
  718 +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption.
  719 +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics.
  720 +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that
  721 +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption
  722 +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because
  723 +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your
  724 +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}.
  725 +%
  726 +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class
  727 +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be
  728 +% displayed while in draft mode.
  729 +%
  730 +%\begin{figure}[!t]
  731 +%\centering
  732 +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure}
  733 +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex,
  734 +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
  735 +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
  736 +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
  737 +%\label{fig_sim}
  738 +%\end{figure}
  739 +
  740 +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this
  741 +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats.
  742 +% However, the Computer Society has been known to put floats at the bottom.
  743 +
  744 +
  745 +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures.
  746 +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.)
  747 +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command,
  748 +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption.
  749 +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing.
  750 +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a
  751 +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur.
  752 +%
  753 +%\begin{figure*}[!t]
  754 +%\centering
  755 +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
  756 +%\label{fig_first_case}}
  757 +%\hfil
  758 +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
  759 +%\label{fig_second_case}}
  760 +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
  761 +%\label{fig_sim}
  762 +%\end{figure*}
  763 +%
  764 +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
  765 +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
  766 +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
  767 +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
  768 +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
  769 +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
  770 +% e.g., \subfloat[].
  771 +
  772 +
  773 +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
  774 +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
  775 +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
  776 +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
  777 +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
  778 +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
  779 +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
  780 +% The \label must come after \caption as always.
  781 +%
  782 +%\begin{table}[!t]
  783 +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste
  784 +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3}
  785 +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of
  786 +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells
  787 +%\caption{An Example of a Table}
  788 +%\label{table_example}
  789 +%\centering
  790 +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables
  791 +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here.
  792 +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|}
  793 +%\hline
  794 +%One & Two\\
  795 +%\hline
  796 +%Three & Four\\
  797 +%\hline
  798 +%\end{tabular}
  799 +%\end{table}
  800 +
  801 +
  802 +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
  803 +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
  804 +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
  805 +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
  806 +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
  807 +% top floats exclusively.
  808 +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
  809 +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
  810 +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
  811 +
  812 +
  813 +
  814 +
  815 +\section{Conclusion}
  816 +The conclusion goes here.
  817 +
  818 +
  819 +
  820 +
  821 +
  822 +% if have a single appendix:
  823 +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations]
  824 +% or
  825 +%\appendix % for no appendix heading
  826 +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section*
  827 +% is possibly needed
  828 +
  829 +% use appendices with more than one appendix
  830 +% then use \section to start each appendix
  831 +% you must declare a \section before using any
  832 +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself
  833 +% starts a section numbered zero.)
  834 +%
  835 +
  836 +
  837 +\appendices
  838 +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation}
  839 +Appendix one text goes here.
  840 +
  841 +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix
  842 +% if you want by leaving the argument blank
  843 +\section{}
  844 +Appendix two text goes here.
  845 +
  846 +
  847 +% use section* for acknowledgment
  848 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  849 + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form
  850 + \section*{Acknowledgments}
  851 +\else
  852 + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form
  853 + \section*{Acknowledgment}
  854 +\fi
  855 +
  856 +
  857 +The authors would like to thank...
  858 +
  859 +
  860 +% Can use something like this to put references on a page
  861 +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option.
  862 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
  863 + \newpage
  864 +\fi
  865 +
  866 +
  867 +
  868 +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference
  869 +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page
  870 +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if
  871 +% the document is modified later
  872 +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8}
  873 +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired:
  874 +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}}
  875 +
  876 +% references section
  877 +
  878 +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file
  879 +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at:
  880 +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/
  881 +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at:
  882 +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/
  883 +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran}
  884 +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s)
  885 +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper}
  886 +%
  887 +% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file
  888 +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references
  889 +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box)
  890 +\begin{thebibliography}{1}
  891 +
  892 +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka}
  893 +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to {\LaTeX}}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus
  894 + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999.
  895 +
  896 +\end{thebibliography}
  897 +
  898 +% biography section
  899 +%
  900 +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are
  901 +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent
  902 +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated
  903 +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create
  904 +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things
  905 +% simpler here.)
  906 +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell}
  907 +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo:
  908 +
  909 +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell}
  910 +Biography text here.
  911 +\end{IEEEbiography}
  912 +
  913 +% if you will not have a photo at all:
  914 +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe}
  915 +Biography text here.
  916 +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto}
  917 +
  918 +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with
  919 +% biographies
  920 +%\newpage
  921 +
  922 +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe}
  923 +Biography text here.
  924 +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto}
  925 +
  926 +% You can push biographies down or up by placing
  927 +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate
  928 +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is
  929 +% on the last page and whether or not the columns
  930 +% are being equalized.
  931 +
  932 +%\vfill
  933 +
  934 +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one
  935 +% is flush with the other column.
  936 +%\enlargethispage{-5in}
  937 +
  938 +
  939 +
  940 +% that's all folks
  941 +\end{document}
  942 +
  943 +
... ...
bare_conf_compsoc.tex 0 → 100644
  1 +++ a/bare_conf_compsoc.tex
  1 +
  2 +%% bare_conf_compsoc.tex
  3 +%% V1.4b
  4 +%% 2015/08/26
  5 +%% by Michael Shell
  6 +%% See:
  7 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
  8 +%% for current contact information.
  9 +%%
  10 +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls
  11 +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE Computer
  12 +%% Society conference paper.
  13 +%%
  14 +%% Support sites:
  15 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
  16 +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran
  17 +%% and
  18 +%% http://www.ieee.org/
  19 +
  20 +%%*************************************************************************
  21 +%% Legal Notice:
  22 +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
  23 +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
  24 +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
  25 +%% User assumes all risk.
  26 +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
  27 +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
  28 +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
  29 +%% of any information contained here.
  30 +%%
  31 +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
  32 +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
  33 +%%
  34 +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
  35 +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
  36 +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
  37 +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
  38 +%% 2003/12/01 or later.
  39 +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
  40 +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
  41 +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
  42 +%%*************************************************************************
  43 +
  44 +
  45 +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system ***
  46 +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
  47 +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can ***
  48 +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** ***
  49 +% The testflow support page is at:
  50 +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
  51 +
  52 +
  53 +
  54 +\documentclass[conference,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
  55 +% Some/most Computer Society conferences require the compsoc mode option,
  56 +% but others may want the standard conference format.
  57 +%
  58 +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
  59 +% manually specify the path to it like:
  60 +% \documentclass[conference,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran}
  61 +
  62 +
  63 +
  64 +
  65 +
  66 +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include:
  67 +% (uncomment the ones you want to load)
  68 +
  69 +
  70 +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES ***
  71 +%
  72 +%\usepackage{ifpdf}
  73 +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional
  74 +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi.
  75 +% usage:
  76 +% \ifpdf
  77 +% % pdf code
  78 +% \else
  79 +% % dvi code
  80 +% \fi
  81 +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from:
  82 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf
  83 +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin
  84 +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way.
  85 +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may
  86 +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages.
  87 +
  88 +
  89 +
  90 +
  91 +
  92 +
  93 +% *** CITATION PACKAGES ***
  94 +%
  95 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  96 + % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option
  97 + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003)
  98 + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
  99 +\else
  100 + % normal IEEE
  101 + \usepackage{cite}
  102 +\fi
  103 +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau
  104 +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package
  105 +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will
  106 +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly
  107 +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using
  108 +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's
  109 +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's
  110 +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
  111 +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
  112 +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
  113 +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
  114 +% The latest version can be obtained at:
  115 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite
  116 +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
  117 +%
  118 +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer
  119 +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use
  120 +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers
  121 +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order
  122 +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite
  123 +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0
  124 +% and later.
  125 +
  126 +
  127 +
  128 +
  129 +
  130 +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES ***
  131 +%
  132 +\ifCLASSINFOpdf
  133 + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
  134 + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
  135 + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}}
  136 + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
  137 + % every instance of \includegraphics
  138 + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png}
  139 +\else
  140 + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx
  141 + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no
  142 + % driver is specified.
  143 + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}
  144 + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
  145 + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}}
  146 + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
  147 + % every instance of \includegraphics
  148 + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps}
  149 +\fi
  150 +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is
  151 +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already
  152 +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation
  153 +% can be obtained at:
  154 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx
  155 +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in
  156 +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at:
  157 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex
  158 +%
  159 +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated
  160 +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics
  161 +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure
  162 +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and
  163 +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats
  164 +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as
  165 +% well as large increases in file sizes.
  166 +%
  167 +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at:
  168 +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex
  169 +
  170 +
  171 +
  172 +
  173 +
  174 +% *** MATH PACKAGES ***
  175 +%
  176 +%\usepackage{amsmath}
  177 +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides
  178 +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics.
  179 +%
  180 +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000
  181 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use:
  182 +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
  183 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally
  184 +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest
  185 +% version and documentation can be obtained at:
  186 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath
  187 +
  188 +
  189 +
  190 +
  191 +
  192 +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES ***
  193 +%
  194 +%\usepackage{algorithmic}
  195 +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito.
  196 +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms.
  197 +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure
  198 +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm
  199 +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or
  200 +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated
  201 +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide
  202 +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of
  203 +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at:
  204 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms
  205 +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable)
  206 +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos:
  207 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx
  208 +
  209 +
  210 +
  211 +
  212 +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES ***
  213 +%
  214 +%\usepackage{array}
  215 +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves
  216 +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better
  217 +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table
  218 +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with
  219 +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly
  220 +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty)
  221 +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The
  222 +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
  223 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array
  224 +
  225 +
  226 +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to
  227 +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high
  228 +% quality.
  229 +
  230 +
  231 +
  232 +
  233 +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES ***
  234 +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  235 +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
  236 +%\else
  237 +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig}
  238 +%\fi
  239 +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement
  240 +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is
  241 +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However,
  242 +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty
  243 +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result
  244 +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure
  245 +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since
  246 +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls
  247 +% handling of captions.
  248 +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather
  249 +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need
  250 +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether
  251 +% compsoc mode has been enabled.
  252 +%
  253 +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at:
  254 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig
  255 +
  256 +
  257 +
  258 +
  259 +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES ***
  260 +%
  261 +%\usepackage{fixltx2e}
  262 +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by
  263 +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems
  264 +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current
  265 +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not
  266 +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a
  267 +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column
  268 +% figure.
  269 +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's
  270 +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will
  271 +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer
  272 +% needed.
  273 +% The latest version and documentation can be found at:
  274 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e
  275 +
  276 +
  277 +%\usepackage{stfloats}
  278 +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e
  279 +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well
  280 +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in
  281 +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command:
  282 +%\fnbelowfloat
  283 +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard
  284 +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package
  285 +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work
  286 +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest
  287 +% version and documentation can be obtained at:
  288 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats
  289 +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow
  290 +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note
  291 +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try
  292 +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty
  293 +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in
  294 +% such ways.
  295 +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible.
  296 +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features
  297 +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats:
  298 +%
  299 +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix}
  300 +% The latest version can be found at:
  301 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix
  302 +
  303 +
  304 +
  305 +
  306 +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES ***
  307 +%
  308 +%\usepackage{url}
  309 +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for
  310 +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX
  311 +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
  312 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url
  313 +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}.
  314 +
  315 +
  316 +
  317 +
  318 +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. ***
  319 +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). ***
  320 +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later.
  321 +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan
  322 +% to submit to, of course. )
  323 +
  324 +
  325 +% correct bad hyphenation here
  326 +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor}
  327 +
  328 +
  329 +\begin{document}
  330 +%
  331 +% paper title
  332 +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
  333 +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
  334 +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
  335 +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
  336 +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
  337 +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Conferences}
  338 +
  339 +
  340 +% author names and affiliations
  341 +% use a multiple column layout for up to three different
  342 +% affiliations
  343 +\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell}
  344 +\IEEEauthorblockA{School of Electrical and\\Computer Engineering\\
  345 +Georgia Institute of Technology\\
  346 +Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\
  347 +Email: http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html}
  348 +\and
  349 +\IEEEauthorblockN{Homer Simpson}
  350 +\IEEEauthorblockA{Twentieth Century Fox\\
  351 +Springfield, USA\\
  352 +Email: homer@thesimpsons.com}
  353 +\and
  354 +\IEEEauthorblockN{James Kirk\\ and Montgomery Scott}
  355 +\IEEEauthorblockA{Starfleet Academy\\
  356 +San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\
  357 +Telephone: (800) 555--1212\\
  358 +Fax: (888) 555--1212}}
  359 +
  360 +% conference papers do not typically use \thanks and this command
  361 +% is locked out in conference mode. If really needed, such as for
  362 +% the acknowledgment of grants, issue a \IEEEoverridecommandlockouts
  363 +% after \documentclass
  364 +
  365 +% for over three affiliations, or if they all won't fit within the width
  366 +% of the page (and note that there is less available width in this regard for
  367 +% compsoc conferences compared to traditional conferences), use this
  368 +% alternative format:
  369 +%
  370 +%\author{\IEEEauthorblockN{Michael Shell\IEEEauthorrefmark{1},
  371 +%Homer Simpson\IEEEauthorrefmark{2},
  372 +%James Kirk\IEEEauthorrefmark{3},
  373 +%Montgomery Scott\IEEEauthorrefmark{3} and
  374 +%Eldon Tyrell\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}}
  375 +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{1}School of Electrical and Computer Engineering\\
  376 +%Georgia Institute of Technology,
  377 +%Atlanta, Georgia 30332--0250\\ Email: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html}
  378 +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{2}Twentieth Century Fox, Springfield, USA\\
  379 +%Email: homer@thesimpsons.com}
  380 +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{3}Starfleet Academy, San Francisco, California 96678-2391\\
  381 +%Telephone: (800) 555--1212, Fax: (888) 555--1212}
  382 +%\IEEEauthorblockA{\IEEEauthorrefmark{4}Tyrell Inc., 123 Replicant Street, Los Angeles, California 90210--4321}}
  383 +
  384 +
  385 +
  386 +
  387 +% use for special paper notices
  388 +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)}
  389 +
  390 +
  391 +
  392 +
  393 +% make the title area
  394 +\maketitle
  395 +
  396 +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations
  397 +% in the abstract
  398 +\begin{abstract}
  399 +The abstract goes here.
  400 +\end{abstract}
  401 +
  402 +% no keywords
  403 +
  404 +
  405 +
  406 +
  407 +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover
  408 +% page as needed:
  409 +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
  410 +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center}
  411 +% \fi
  412 +%
  413 +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and
  414 +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes.
  415 +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle
  416 +
  417 +
  418 +
  419 +\section{Introduction}
  420 +% no \IEEEPARstart
  421 +This demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
  422 +for IEEE Computer Society conference papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
  423 +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later.
  424 +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
  425 +% (should never be an issue)
  426 +I wish you the best of success.
  427 +
  428 +\hfill mds
  429 +
  430 +\hfill August 26, 2015
  431 +
  432 +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
  433 +Subsection text here.
  434 +
  435 +
  436 +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here}
  437 +Subsubsection text here.
  438 +
  439 +
  440 +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package.
  441 +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption.
  442 +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics.
  443 +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that
  444 +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption
  445 +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because
  446 +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your
  447 +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}.
  448 +%
  449 +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class
  450 +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be
  451 +% displayed while in draft mode.
  452 +%
  453 +%\begin{figure}[!t]
  454 +%\centering
  455 +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure}
  456 +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex,
  457 +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
  458 +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
  459 +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
  460 +%\label{fig_sim}
  461 +%\end{figure}
  462 +
  463 +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this
  464 +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats.
  465 +
  466 +
  467 +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures.
  468 +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.)
  469 +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command,
  470 +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption.
  471 +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing.
  472 +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a
  473 +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur.
  474 +%
  475 +%\begin{figure*}[!t]
  476 +%\centering
  477 +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
  478 +%\label{fig_first_case}}
  479 +%\hfil
  480 +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
  481 +%\label{fig_second_case}}
  482 +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
  483 +%\label{fig_sim}
  484 +%\end{figure*}
  485 +%
  486 +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
  487 +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
  488 +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
  489 +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
  490 +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
  491 +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
  492 +% e.g., \subfloat[].
  493 +
  494 +
  495 +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
  496 +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
  497 +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
  498 +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
  499 +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
  500 +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
  501 +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
  502 +% The \label must come after \caption as always.
  503 +%
  504 +%\begin{table}[!t]
  505 +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste
  506 +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3}
  507 +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of
  508 +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells
  509 +%\caption{An Example of a Table}
  510 +%\label{table_example}
  511 +%\centering
  512 +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables
  513 +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here.
  514 +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|}
  515 +%\hline
  516 +%One & Two\\
  517 +%\hline
  518 +%Three & Four\\
  519 +%\hline
  520 +%\end{tabular}
  521 +%\end{table}
  522 +
  523 +
  524 +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
  525 +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
  526 +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
  527 +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
  528 +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
  529 +% top floats exclusively.
  530 +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
  531 +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
  532 +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
  533 +
  534 +
  535 +
  536 +
  537 +\section{Conclusion}
  538 +The conclusion goes here.
  539 +
  540 +
  541 +
  542 +
  543 +% conference papers do not normally have an appendix
  544 +
  545 +
  546 +
  547 +% use section* for acknowledgment
  548 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  549 + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form
  550 + \section*{Acknowledgments}
  551 +\else
  552 + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form
  553 + \section*{Acknowledgment}
  554 +\fi
  555 +
  556 +
  557 +The authors would like to thank...
  558 +
  559 +
  560 +
  561 +
  562 +
  563 +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference
  564 +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page
  565 +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if
  566 +% the document is modified later
  567 +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8}
  568 +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired:
  569 +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}}
  570 +
  571 +% references section
  572 +
  573 +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file
  574 +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at:
  575 +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/
  576 +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at:
  577 +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/
  578 +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran}
  579 +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s)
  580 +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper}
  581 +%
  582 +% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file
  583 +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references
  584 +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box)
  585 +\begin{thebibliography}{1}
  586 +
  587 +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka}
  588 +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus
  589 + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999.
  590 +
  591 +\end{thebibliography}
  592 +
  593 +
  594 +
  595 +
  596 +% that's all folks
  597 +\end{document}
  598 +
  599 +
... ...
bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex 0 → 100644
  1 +++ a/bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
  1 +
  2 +%% bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
  3 +%% V1.4b
  4 +%% 2015/08/26
  5 +%% by Michael Shell
  6 +%% See:
  7 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/
  8 +%% for current contact information.
  9 +%%
  10 +%% This is a skeleton file demonstrating the use of IEEEtran.cls
  11 +%% (requires IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b or later) with an IEEE
  12 +%% Computer Society journal paper.
  13 +%%
  14 +%% Support sites:
  15 +%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
  16 +%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran
  17 +%% and
  18 +%% http://www.ieee.org/
  19 +
  20 +%%*************************************************************************
  21 +%% Legal Notice:
  22 +%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
  23 +%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
  24 +%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE!
  25 +%% User assumes all risk.
  26 +%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
  27 +%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
  28 +%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
  29 +%% of any information contained here.
  30 +%%
  31 +%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
  32 +%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
  33 +%%
  34 +%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
  35 +%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
  36 +%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
  37 +%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
  38 +%% 2003/12/01 or later.
  39 +%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
  40 +%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including **
  41 +%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
  42 +%%*************************************************************************
  43 +
  44 +
  45 +% *** Authors should verify (and, if needed, correct) their LaTeX system ***
  46 +% *** with the testflow diagnostic prior to trusting their LaTeX platform ***
  47 +% *** with production work. The IEEE's font choices and paper sizes can ***
  48 +% *** trigger bugs that do not appear when using other class files. *** ***
  49 +% The testflow support page is at:
  50 +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/testflow/
  51 +
  52 +
  53 +\documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{IEEEtran}
  54 +%
  55 +% If IEEEtran.cls has not been installed into the LaTeX system files,
  56 +% manually specify the path to it like:
  57 +% \documentclass[10pt,journal,compsoc]{../sty/IEEEtran}
  58 +
  59 +
  60 +
  61 +
  62 +
  63 +% Some very useful LaTeX packages include:
  64 +% (uncomment the ones you want to load)
  65 +
  66 +
  67 +% *** MISC UTILITY PACKAGES ***
  68 +%
  69 +%\usepackage{ifpdf}
  70 +% Heiko Oberdiek's ifpdf.sty is very useful if you need conditional
  71 +% compilation based on whether the output is pdf or dvi.
  72 +% usage:
  73 +% \ifpdf
  74 +% % pdf code
  75 +% \else
  76 +% % dvi code
  77 +% \fi
  78 +% The latest version of ifpdf.sty can be obtained from:
  79 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ifpdf
  80 +% Also, note that IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later provides a builtin
  81 +% \ifCLASSINFOpdf conditional that works the same way.
  82 +% When switching from latex to pdflatex and vice-versa, the compiler may
  83 +% have to be run twice to clear warning/error messages.
  84 +
  85 +
  86 +
  87 +
  88 +
  89 +
  90 +% *** CITATION PACKAGES ***
  91 +%
  92 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  93 + % IEEE Computer Society needs nocompress option
  94 + % requires cite.sty v4.0 or later (November 2003)
  95 + \usepackage[nocompress]{cite}
  96 +\else
  97 + % normal IEEE
  98 + \usepackage{cite}
  99 +\fi
  100 +% cite.sty was written by Donald Arseneau
  101 +% V1.6 and later of IEEEtran pre-defines the format of the cite.sty package
  102 +% \cite{} output to follow that of the IEEE. Loading the cite package will
  103 +% result in citation numbers being automatically sorted and properly
  104 +% "compressed/ranged". e.g., [1], [9], [2], [7], [5], [6] without using
  105 +% cite.sty will become [1], [2], [5]--[7], [9] using cite.sty. cite.sty's
  106 +% \cite will automatically add leading space, if needed. Use cite.sty's
  107 +% noadjust option (cite.sty V3.8 and later) if you want to turn this off
  108 +% such as if a citation ever needs to be enclosed in parenthesis.
  109 +% cite.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. Be sure and use
  110 +% version 5.0 (2009-03-20) and later if using hyperref.sty.
  111 +% The latest version can be obtained at:
  112 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/cite
  113 +% The documentation is contained in the cite.sty file itself.
  114 +%
  115 +% Note that some packages require special options to format as the Computer
  116 +% Society requires. In particular, Computer Society papers do not use
  117 +% compressed citation ranges as is done in typical IEEE papers
  118 +% (e.g., [1]-[4]). Instead, they list every citation separately in order
  119 +% (e.g., [1], [2], [3], [4]). To get the latter we need to load the cite
  120 +% package with the nocompress option which is supported by cite.sty v4.0
  121 +% and later. Note also the use of a CLASSOPTION conditional provided by
  122 +% IEEEtran.cls V1.7 and later.
  123 +
  124 +
  125 +
  126 +
  127 +
  128 +% *** GRAPHICS RELATED PACKAGES ***
  129 +%
  130 +\ifCLASSINFOpdf
  131 + % \usepackage[pdftex]{graphicx}
  132 + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
  133 + % \graphicspath{{../pdf/}{../jpeg/}}
  134 + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
  135 + % every instance of \includegraphics
  136 + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.jpeg,.png}
  137 +\else
  138 + % or other class option (dvipsone, dvipdf, if not using dvips). graphicx
  139 + % will default to the driver specified in the system graphics.cfg if no
  140 + % driver is specified.
  141 + % \usepackage[dvips]{graphicx}
  142 + % declare the path(s) where your graphic files are
  143 + % \graphicspath{{../eps/}}
  144 + % and their extensions so you won't have to specify these with
  145 + % every instance of \includegraphics
  146 + % \DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.eps}
  147 +\fi
  148 +% graphicx was written by David Carlisle and Sebastian Rahtz. It is
  149 +% required if you want graphics, photos, etc. graphicx.sty is already
  150 +% installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest version and documentation
  151 +% can be obtained at:
  152 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/graphicx
  153 +% Another good source of documentation is "Using Imported Graphics in
  154 +% LaTeX2e" by Keith Reckdahl which can be found at:
  155 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/epslatex
  156 +%
  157 +% latex, and pdflatex in dvi mode, support graphics in encapsulated
  158 +% postscript (.eps) format. pdflatex in pdf mode supports graphics
  159 +% in .pdf, .jpeg, .png and .mps (metapost) formats. Users should ensure
  160 +% that all non-photo figures use a vector format (.eps, .pdf, .mps) and
  161 +% not a bitmapped formats (.jpeg, .png). The IEEE frowns on bitmapped formats
  162 +% which can result in "jaggedy"/blurry rendering of lines and letters as
  163 +% well as large increases in file sizes.
  164 +%
  165 +% You can find documentation about the pdfTeX application at:
  166 +% http://www.tug.org/applications/pdftex
  167 +
  168 +
  169 +
  170 +
  171 +
  172 +
  173 +% *** MATH PACKAGES ***
  174 +%
  175 +%\usepackage{amsmath}
  176 +% A popular package from the American Mathematical Society that provides
  177 +% many useful and powerful commands for dealing with mathematics.
  178 +%
  179 +% Note that the amsmath package sets \interdisplaylinepenalty to 10000
  180 +% thus preventing page breaks from occurring within multiline equations. Use:
  181 +%\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
  182 +% after loading amsmath to restore such page breaks as IEEEtran.cls normally
  183 +% does. amsmath.sty is already installed on most LaTeX systems. The latest
  184 +% version and documentation can be obtained at:
  185 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath
  186 +
  187 +
  188 +
  189 +
  190 +
  191 +% *** SPECIALIZED LIST PACKAGES ***
  192 +%
  193 +%\usepackage{algorithmic}
  194 +% algorithmic.sty was written by Peter Williams and Rogerio Brito.
  195 +% This package provides an algorithmic environment fo describing algorithms.
  196 +% You can use the algorithmic environment in-text or within a figure
  197 +% environment to provide for a floating algorithm. Do NOT use the algorithm
  198 +% floating environment provided by algorithm.sty (by the same authors) or
  199 +% algorithm2e.sty (by Christophe Fiorio) as the IEEE does not use dedicated
  200 +% algorithm float types and packages that provide these will not provide
  201 +% correct IEEE style captions. The latest version and documentation of
  202 +% algorithmic.sty can be obtained at:
  203 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithms
  204 +% Also of interest may be the (relatively newer and more customizable)
  205 +% algorithmicx.sty package by Szasz Janos:
  206 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithmicx
  207 +
  208 +
  209 +
  210 +
  211 +% *** ALIGNMENT PACKAGES ***
  212 +%
  213 +%\usepackage{array}
  214 +% Frank Mittelbach's and David Carlisle's array.sty patches and improves
  215 +% the standard LaTeX2e array and tabular environments to provide better
  216 +% appearance and additional user controls. As the default LaTeX2e table
  217 +% generation code is lacking to the point of almost being broken with
  218 +% respect to the quality of the end results, all users are strongly
  219 +% advised to use an enhanced (at the very least that provided by array.sty)
  220 +% set of table tools. array.sty is already installed on most systems. The
  221 +% latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
  222 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/array
  223 +
  224 +
  225 +% IEEEtran contains the IEEEeqnarray family of commands that can be used to
  226 +% generate multiline equations as well as matrices, tables, etc., of high
  227 +% quality.
  228 +
  229 +
  230 +
  231 +
  232 +% *** SUBFIGURE PACKAGES ***
  233 +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  234 +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize,labelfont=sf,textfont=sf]{subfig}
  235 +%\else
  236 +% \usepackage[caption=false,font=footnotesize]{subfig}
  237 +%\fi
  238 +% subfig.sty, written by Steven Douglas Cochran, is the modern replacement
  239 +% for subfigure.sty, the latter of which is no longer maintained and is
  240 +% incompatible with some LaTeX packages including fixltx2e. However,
  241 +% subfig.sty requires and automatically loads Axel Sommerfeldt's caption.sty
  242 +% which will override IEEEtran.cls' handling of captions and this will result
  243 +% in non-IEEE style figure/table captions. To prevent this problem, be sure
  244 +% and invoke subfig.sty's "caption=false" package option (available since
  245 +% subfig.sty version 1.3, 2005/06/28) as this is will preserve IEEEtran.cls
  246 +% handling of captions.
  247 +% Note that the Computer Society format requires a sans serif font rather
  248 +% than the serif font used in traditional IEEE formatting and thus the need
  249 +% to invoke different subfig.sty package options depending on whether
  250 +% compsoc mode has been enabled.
  251 +%
  252 +% The latest version and documentation of subfig.sty can be obtained at:
  253 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/subfig
  254 +
  255 +
  256 +
  257 +
  258 +% *** FLOAT PACKAGES ***
  259 +%
  260 +%\usepackage{fixltx2e}
  261 +% fixltx2e, the successor to the earlier fix2col.sty, was written by
  262 +% Frank Mittelbach and David Carlisle. This package corrects a few problems
  263 +% in the LaTeX2e kernel, the most notable of which is that in current
  264 +% LaTeX2e releases, the ordering of single and double column floats is not
  265 +% guaranteed to be preserved. Thus, an unpatched LaTeX2e can allow a
  266 +% single column figure to be placed prior to an earlier double column
  267 +% figure.
  268 +% Be aware that LaTeX2e kernels dated 2015 and later have fixltx2e.sty's
  269 +% corrections already built into the system in which case a warning will
  270 +% be issued if an attempt is made to load fixltx2e.sty as it is no longer
  271 +% needed.
  272 +% The latest version and documentation can be found at:
  273 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/fixltx2e
  274 +
  275 +
  276 +%\usepackage{stfloats}
  277 +% stfloats.sty was written by Sigitas Tolusis. This package gives LaTeX2e
  278 +% the ability to do double column floats at the bottom of the page as well
  279 +% as the top. (e.g., "\begin{figure*}[!b]" is not normally possible in
  280 +% LaTeX2e). It also provides a command:
  281 +%\fnbelowfloat
  282 +% to enable the placement of footnotes below bottom floats (the standard
  283 +% LaTeX2e kernel puts them above bottom floats). This is an invasive package
  284 +% which rewrites many portions of the LaTeX2e float routines. It may not work
  285 +% with other packages that modify the LaTeX2e float routines. The latest
  286 +% version and documentation can be obtained at:
  287 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/stfloats
  288 +% Do not use the stfloats baselinefloat ability as the IEEE does not allow
  289 +% \baselineskip to stretch. Authors submitting work to the IEEE should note
  290 +% that the IEEE rarely uses double column equations and that authors should try
  291 +% to avoid such use. Do not be tempted to use the cuted.sty or midfloat.sty
  292 +% packages (also by Sigitas Tolusis) as the IEEE does not format its papers in
  293 +% such ways.
  294 +% Do not attempt to use stfloats with fixltx2e as they are incompatible.
  295 +% Instead, use Morten Hogholm'a dblfloatfix which combines the features
  296 +% of both fixltx2e and stfloats:
  297 +%
  298 +% \usepackage{dblfloatfix}
  299 +% The latest version can be found at:
  300 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/dblfloatfix
  301 +
  302 +
  303 +
  304 +
  305 +%\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
  306 +% \usepackage[nomarkers]{endfloat}
  307 +% \let\MYoriglatexcaption\caption
  308 +% \renewcommand{\caption}[2][\relax]{\MYoriglatexcaption[#2]{#2}}
  309 +%\fi
  310 +% endfloat.sty was written by James Darrell McCauley, Jeff Goldberg and
  311 +% Axel Sommerfeldt. This package may be useful when used in conjunction with
  312 +% IEEEtran.cls' captionsoff option. Some IEEE journals/societies require that
  313 +% submissions have lists of figures/tables at the end of the paper and that
  314 +% figures/tables without any captions are placed on a page by themselves at
  315 +% the end of the document. If needed, the draftcls IEEEtran class option or
  316 +% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch interface can be used to increase the line
  317 +% spacing as well. Be sure and use the nomarkers option of endfloat to
  318 +% prevent endfloat from "marking" where the figures would have been placed
  319 +% in the text. The two hack lines of code above are a slight modification of
  320 +% that suggested by in the endfloat docs (section 8.4.1) to ensure that
  321 +% the full captions always appear in the list of figures/tables - even if
  322 +% the user used the short optional argument of \caption[]{}.
  323 +% IEEE papers do not typically make use of \caption[]'s optional argument,
  324 +% so this should not be an issue. A similar trick can be used to disable
  325 +% captions of packages such as subfig.sty that lack options to turn off
  326 +% the subcaptions:
  327 +% For subfig.sty:
  328 +% \let\MYorigsubfloat\subfloat
  329 +% \renewcommand{\subfloat}[2][\relax]{\MYorigsubfloat[]{#2}}
  330 +% However, the above trick will not work if both optional arguments of
  331 +% the \subfloat command are used. Furthermore, there needs to be a
  332 +% description of each subfigure *somewhere* and endfloat does not add
  333 +% subfigure captions to its list of figures. Thus, the best approach is to
  334 +% avoid the use of subfigure captions (many IEEE journals avoid them anyway)
  335 +% and instead reference/explain all the subfigures within the main caption.
  336 +% The latest version of endfloat.sty and its documentation can obtained at:
  337 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/endfloat
  338 +%
  339 +% The IEEEtran \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff conditional can also be used
  340 +% later in the document, say, to conditionally put the References on a
  341 +% page by themselves.
  342 +
  343 +
  344 +
  345 +
  346 +% *** PDF, URL AND HYPERLINK PACKAGES ***
  347 +%
  348 +%\usepackage{url}
  349 +% url.sty was written by Donald Arseneau. It provides better support for
  350 +% handling and breaking URLs. url.sty is already installed on most LaTeX
  351 +% systems. The latest version and documentation can be obtained at:
  352 +% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/url
  353 +% Basically, \url{my_url_here}.
  354 +
  355 +
  356 +
  357 +
  358 +
  359 +% *** Do not adjust lengths that control margins, column widths, etc. ***
  360 +% *** Do not use packages that alter fonts (such as pslatex). ***
  361 +% There should be no need to do such things with IEEEtran.cls V1.6 and later.
  362 +% (Unless specifically asked to do so by the journal or conference you plan
  363 +% to submit to, of course. )
  364 +
  365 +
  366 +% correct bad hyphenation here
  367 +\hyphenation{op-tical net-works semi-conduc-tor}
  368 +
  369 +
  370 +\begin{document}
  371 +%
  372 +% paper title
  373 +% Titles are generally capitalized except for words such as a, an, and, as,
  374 +% at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to and up, which are usually
  375 +% not capitalized unless they are the first or last word of the title.
  376 +% Linebreaks \\ can be used within to get better formatting as desired.
  377 +% Do not put math or special symbols in the title.
  378 +\title{Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for\\ IEEE Computer Society Journals}
  379 +%
  380 +%
  381 +% author names and IEEE memberships
  382 +% note positions of commas and nonbreaking spaces ( ~ ) LaTeX will not break
  383 +% a structure at a ~ so this keeps an author's name from being broken across
  384 +% two lines.
  385 +% use \thanks{} to gain access to the first footnote area
  386 +% a separate \thanks must be used for each paragraph as LaTeX2e's \thanks
  387 +% was not built to handle multiple paragraphs
  388 +%
  389 +%
  390 +%\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks is a special \thanks that produces the bulleted
  391 +% lists the Computer Society journals use for "first footnote" author
  392 +% affiliations. Use \IEEEcompsocthanksitem which works much like \item
  393 +% for each affiliation group. When not in compsoc mode,
  394 +% \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks becomes like \thanks and
  395 +% \IEEEcompsocthanksitem becomes a line break with idention. This
  396 +% facilitates dual compilation, although admittedly the differences in the
  397 +% desired content of \author between the different types of papers makes a
  398 +% one-size-fits-all approach a daunting prospect. For instance, compsoc
  399 +% journal papers have the author affiliations above the "Manuscript
  400 +% received ..." text while in non-compsoc journals this is reversed. Sigh.
  401 +
  402 +\author{Michael~Shell,~\IEEEmembership{Member,~IEEE,}
  403 + John~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Fellow,~OSA,}
  404 + and~Jane~Doe,~\IEEEmembership{Life~Fellow,~IEEE}% <-this % stops a space
  405 +\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem M. Shell was with the Department
  406 +of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta,
  407 +GA, 30332.\protect\\
  408 +% note need leading \protect in front of \\ to get a newline within \thanks as
  409 +% \\ is fragile and will error, could use \hfil\break instead.
  410 +E-mail: see http://www.michaelshell.org/contact.html
  411 +\IEEEcompsocthanksitem J. Doe and J. Doe are with Anonymous University.}% <-this % stops an unwanted space
  412 +\thanks{Manuscript received April 19, 2005; revised August 26, 2015.}}
  413 +
  414 +% note the % following the last \IEEEmembership and also \thanks -
  415 +% these prevent an unwanted space from occurring between the last author name
  416 +% and the end of the author line. i.e., if you had this:
  417 +%
  418 +% \author{....lastname \thanks{...} \thanks{...} }
  419 +% ^------------^------------^----Do not want these spaces!
  420 +%
  421 +% a space would be appended to the last name and could cause every name on that
  422 +% line to be shifted left slightly. This is one of those "LaTeX things". For
  423 +% instance, "\textbf{A} \textbf{B}" will typeset as "A B" not "AB". To get
  424 +% "AB" then you have to do: "\textbf{A}\textbf{B}"
  425 +% \thanks is no different in this regard, so shield the last } of each \thanks
  426 +% that ends a line with a % and do not let a space in before the next \thanks.
  427 +% Spaces after \IEEEmembership other than the last one are OK (and needed) as
  428 +% you are supposed to have spaces between the names. For what it is worth,
  429 +% this is a minor point as most people would not even notice if the said evil
  430 +% space somehow managed to creep in.
  431 +
  432 +
  433 +
  434 +% The paper headers
  435 +\markboth{Journal of \LaTeX\ Class Files,~Vol.~14, No.~8, August~2015}%
  436 +{Shell \MakeLowercase{\textit{et al.}}: Bare Demo of IEEEtran.cls for Computer Society Journals}
  437 +% The only time the second header will appear is for the odd numbered pages
  438 +% after the title page when using the twoside option.
  439 +%
  440 +% *** Note that you probably will NOT want to include the author's ***
  441 +% *** name in the headers of peer review papers. ***
  442 +% You can use \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview for conditional compilation here if
  443 +% you desire.
  444 +
  445 +
  446 +
  447 +% The publisher's ID mark at the bottom of the page is less important with
  448 +% Computer Society journal papers as those publications place the marks
  449 +% outside of the main text columns and, therefore, unlike regular IEEE
  450 +% journals, the available text space is not reduced by their presence.
  451 +% If you want to put a publisher's ID mark on the page you can do it like
  452 +% this:
  453 +%\IEEEpubid{0000--0000/00\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}
  454 +% or like this to get the Computer Society new two part style.
  455 +%\IEEEpubid{\makebox[\columnwidth]{\hfill 0000--0000/00/\$00.00~\copyright~2015 IEEE}%
  456 +%\hspace{\columnsep}\makebox[\columnwidth]{Published by the IEEE Computer Society\hfill}}
  457 +% Remember, if you use this you must call \IEEEpubidadjcol in the second
  458 +% column for its text to clear the IEEEpubid mark (Computer Society jorunal
  459 +% papers don't need this extra clearance.)
  460 +
  461 +
  462 +
  463 +% use for special paper notices
  464 +%\IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)}
  465 +
  466 +
  467 +
  468 +% for Computer Society papers, we must declare the abstract and index terms
  469 +% PRIOR to the title within the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext IEEEtran
  470 +% command as these need to go into the title area created by \maketitle.
  471 +% As a general rule, do not put math, special symbols or citations
  472 +% in the abstract or keywords.
  473 +\IEEEtitleabstractindextext{%
  474 +\begin{abstract}
  475 +The abstract goes here.
  476 +\end{abstract}
  477 +
  478 +% Note that keywords are not normally used for peerreview papers.
  479 +\begin{IEEEkeywords}
  480 +Computer Society, IEEE, IEEEtran, journal, \LaTeX, paper, template.
  481 +\end{IEEEkeywords}}
  482 +
  483 +
  484 +% make the title area
  485 +\maketitle
  486 +
  487 +
  488 +% To allow for easy dual compilation without having to reenter the
  489 +% abstract/keywords data, the \IEEEtitleabstractindextext text will
  490 +% not be used in maketitle, but will appear (i.e., to be "transported")
  491 +% here as \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext when the compsoc
  492 +% or transmag modes are not selected <OR> if conference mode is selected
  493 +% - because all conference papers position the abstract like regular
  494 +% papers do.
  495 +\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext
  496 +% \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext has no effect when using
  497 +% compsoc or transmag under a non-conference mode.
  498 +
  499 +
  500 +
  501 +% For peer review papers, you can put extra information on the cover
  502 +% page as needed:
  503 +% \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
  504 +% \begin{center} \bfseries EDICS Category: 3-BBND \end{center}
  505 +% \fi
  506 +%
  507 +% For peerreview papers, this IEEEtran command inserts a page break and
  508 +% creates the second title. It will be ignored for other modes.
  509 +\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle
  510 +
  511 +
  512 +
  513 +\IEEEraisesectionheading{\section{Introduction}\label{sec:introduction}}
  514 +% Computer Society journal (but not conference!) papers do something unusual
  515 +% with the very first section heading (almost always called "Introduction").
  516 +% They place it ABOVE the main text! IEEEtran.cls does not automatically do
  517 +% this for you, but you can achieve this effect with the provided
  518 +% \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command. Note the need to keep any \label that
  519 +% is to refer to the section immediately after \section in the above as
  520 +% \IEEEraisesectionheading puts \section within a raised box.
  521 +
  522 +
  523 +
  524 +
  525 +% The very first letter is a 2 line initial drop letter followed
  526 +% by the rest of the first word in caps (small caps for compsoc).
  527 +%
  528 +% form to use if the first word consists of a single letter:
  529 +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{demo} file is ....
  530 +%
  531 +% form to use if you need the single drop letter followed by
  532 +% normal text (unknown if ever used by the IEEE):
  533 +% \IEEEPARstart{A}{}demo file is ....
  534 +%
  535 +% Some journals put the first two words in caps:
  536 +% \IEEEPARstart{T}{his demo} file is ....
  537 +%
  538 +% Here we have the typical use of a "T" for an initial drop letter
  539 +% and "HIS" in caps to complete the first word.
  540 +\IEEEPARstart{T}{his} demo file is intended to serve as a ``starter file''
  541 +for IEEE Computer Society journal papers produced under \LaTeX\ using
  542 +IEEEtran.cls version 1.8b and later.
  543 +% You must have at least 2 lines in the paragraph with the drop letter
  544 +% (should never be an issue)
  545 +I wish you the best of success.
  546 +
  547 +\hfill mds
  548 +
  549 +\hfill August 26, 2015
  550 +
  551 +\subsection{Subsection Heading Here}
  552 +Subsection text here.
  553 +
  554 +% needed in second column of first page if using \IEEEpubid
  555 +%\IEEEpubidadjcol
  556 +
  557 +\subsubsection{Subsubsection Heading Here}
  558 +Subsubsection text here.
  559 +
  560 +
  561 +% An example of a floating figure using the graphicx package.
  562 +% Note that \label must occur AFTER (or within) \caption.
  563 +% For figures, \caption should occur after the \includegraphics.
  564 +% Note that IEEEtran v1.7 and later has special internal code that
  565 +% is designed to preserve the operation of \label within \caption
  566 +% even when the captionsoff option is in effect. However, because
  567 +% of issues like this, it may be the safest practice to put all your
  568 +% \label just after \caption rather than within \caption{}.
  569 +%
  570 +% Reminder: the "draftcls" or "draftclsnofoot", not "draft", class
  571 +% option should be used if it is desired that the figures are to be
  572 +% displayed while in draft mode.
  573 +%
  574 +%\begin{figure}[!t]
  575 +%\centering
  576 +%\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{myfigure}
  577 +% where an .eps filename suffix will be assumed under latex,
  578 +% and a .pdf suffix will be assumed for pdflatex; or what has been declared
  579 +% via \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
  580 +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
  581 +%\label{fig_sim}
  582 +%\end{figure}
  583 +
  584 +% Note that the IEEE typically puts floats only at the top, even when this
  585 +% results in a large percentage of a column being occupied by floats.
  586 +% However, the Computer Society has been known to put floats at the bottom.
  587 +
  588 +
  589 +% An example of a double column floating figure using two subfigures.
  590 +% (The subfig.sty package must be loaded for this to work.)
  591 +% The subfigure \label commands are set within each subfloat command,
  592 +% and the \label for the overall figure must come after \caption.
  593 +% \hfil is used as a separator to get equal spacing.
  594 +% Watch out that the combined width of all the subfigures on a
  595 +% line do not exceed the text width or a line break will occur.
  596 +%
  597 +%\begin{figure*}[!t]
  598 +%\centering
  599 +%\subfloat[Case I]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
  600 +%\label{fig_first_case}}
  601 +%\hfil
  602 +%\subfloat[Case II]{\includegraphics[width=2.5in]{box}%
  603 +%\label{fig_second_case}}
  604 +%\caption{Simulation results for the network.}
  605 +%\label{fig_sim}
  606 +%\end{figure*}
  607 +%
  608 +% Note that often IEEE papers with subfigures do not employ subfigure
  609 +% captions (using the optional argument to \subfloat[]), but instead will
  610 +% reference/describe all of them (a), (b), etc., within the main caption.
  611 +% Be aware that for subfig.sty to generate the (a), (b), etc., subfigure
  612 +% labels, the optional argument to \subfloat must be present. If a
  613 +% subcaption is not desired, just leave its contents blank,
  614 +% e.g., \subfloat[].
  615 +
  616 +
  617 +% An example of a floating table. Note that, for IEEE style tables, the
  618 +% \caption command should come BEFORE the table and, given that table
  619 +% captions serve much like titles, are usually capitalized except for words
  620 +% such as a, an, and, as, at, but, by, for, in, nor, of, on, or, the, to
  621 +% and up, which are usually not capitalized unless they are the first or
  622 +% last word of the caption. Table text will default to \footnotesize as
  623 +% the IEEE normally uses this smaller font for tables.
  624 +% The \label must come after \caption as always.
  625 +%
  626 +%\begin{table}[!t]
  627 +%% increase table row spacing, adjust to taste
  628 +%\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.3}
  629 +% if using array.sty, it might be a good idea to tweak the value of
  630 +% \extrarowheight as needed to properly center the text within the cells
  631 +%\caption{An Example of a Table}
  632 +%\label{table_example}
  633 +%\centering
  634 +%% Some packages, such as MDW tools, offer better commands for making tables
  635 +%% than the plain LaTeX2e tabular which is used here.
  636 +%\begin{tabular}{|c||c|}
  637 +%\hline
  638 +%One & Two\\
  639 +%\hline
  640 +%Three & Four\\
  641 +%\hline
  642 +%\end{tabular}
  643 +%\end{table}
  644 +
  645 +
  646 +% Note that the IEEE does not put floats in the very first column
  647 +% - or typically anywhere on the first page for that matter. Also,
  648 +% in-text middle ("here") positioning is typically not used, but it
  649 +% is allowed and encouraged for Computer Society conferences (but
  650 +% not Computer Society journals). Most IEEE journals/conferences use
  651 +% top floats exclusively.
  652 +% Note that, LaTeX2e, unlike IEEE journals/conferences, places
  653 +% footnotes above bottom floats. This can be corrected via the
  654 +% \fnbelowfloat command of the stfloats package.
  655 +
  656 +
  657 +
  658 +
  659 +\section{Conclusion}
  660 +The conclusion goes here.
  661 +
  662 +
  663 +
  664 +
  665 +
  666 +% if have a single appendix:
  667 +%\appendix[Proof of the Zonklar Equations]
  668 +% or
  669 +%\appendix % for no appendix heading
  670 +% do not use \section anymore after \appendix, only \section*
  671 +% is possibly needed
  672 +
  673 +% use appendices with more than one appendix
  674 +% then use \section to start each appendix
  675 +% you must declare a \section before using any
  676 +% \subsection or using \label (\appendices by itself
  677 +% starts a section numbered zero.)
  678 +%
  679 +
  680 +
  681 +\appendices
  682 +\section{Proof of the First Zonklar Equation}
  683 +Appendix one text goes here.
  684 +
  685 +% you can choose not to have a title for an appendix
  686 +% if you want by leaving the argument blank
  687 +\section{}
  688 +Appendix two text goes here.
  689 +
  690 +
  691 +% use section* for acknowledgment
  692 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  693 + % The Computer Society usually uses the plural form
  694 + \section*{Acknowledgments}
  695 +\else
  696 + % regular IEEE prefers the singular form
  697 + \section*{Acknowledgment}
  698 +\fi
  699 +
  700 +
  701 +The authors would like to thank...
  702 +
  703 +
  704 +% Can use something like this to put references on a page
  705 +% by themselves when using endfloat and the captionsoff option.
  706 +\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
  707 + \newpage
  708 +\fi
  709 +
  710 +
  711 +
  712 +% trigger a \newpage just before the given reference
  713 +% number - used to balance the columns on the last page
  714 +% adjust value as needed - may need to be readjusted if
  715 +% the document is modified later
  716 +%\IEEEtriggeratref{8}
  717 +% The "triggered" command can be changed if desired:
  718 +%\IEEEtriggercmd{\enlargethispage{-5in}}
  719 +
  720 +% references section
  721 +
  722 +% can use a bibliography generated by BibTeX as a .bbl file
  723 +% BibTeX documentation can be easily obtained at:
  724 +% http://mirror.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/
  725 +% The IEEEtran BibTeX style support page is at:
  726 +% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/bibtex/
  727 +%\bibliographystyle{IEEEtran}
  728 +% argument is your BibTeX string definitions and bibliography database(s)
  729 +%\bibliography{IEEEabrv,../bib/paper}
  730 +%
  731 +% <OR> manually copy in the resultant .bbl file
  732 +% set second argument of \begin to the number of references
  733 +% (used to reserve space for the reference number labels box)
  734 +\begin{thebibliography}{1}
  735 +
  736 +\bibitem{IEEEhowto:kopka}
  737 +H.~Kopka and P.~W. Daly, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, 3rd~ed.\hskip 1em plus
  738 + 0.5em minus 0.4em\relax Harlow, England: Addison-Wesley, 1999.
  739 +
  740 +\end{thebibliography}
  741 +
  742 +% biography section
  743 +%
  744 +% If you have an EPS/PDF photo (graphicx package needed) extra braces are
  745 +% needed around the contents of the optional argument to biography to prevent
  746 +% the LaTeX parser from getting confused when it sees the complicated
  747 +% \includegraphics command within an optional argument. (You could create
  748 +% your own custom macro containing the \includegraphics command to make things
  749 +% simpler here.)
  750 +%\begin{IEEEbiography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,keepaspectratio]{mshell}}]{Michael Shell}
  751 +% or if you just want to reserve a space for a photo:
  752 +
  753 +\begin{IEEEbiography}{Michael Shell}
  754 +Biography text here.
  755 +\end{IEEEbiography}
  756 +
  757 +% if you will not have a photo at all:
  758 +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{John Doe}
  759 +Biography text here.
  760 +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto}
  761 +
  762 +% insert where needed to balance the two columns on the last page with
  763 +% biographies
  764 +%\newpage
  765 +
  766 +\begin{IEEEbiographynophoto}{Jane Doe}
  767 +Biography text here.
  768 +\end{IEEEbiographynophoto}
  769 +
  770 +% You can push biographies down or up by placing
  771 +% a \vfill before or after them. The appropriate
  772 +% use of \vfill depends on what kind of text is
  773 +% on the last page and whether or not the columns
  774 +% are being equalized.
  775 +
  776 +%\vfill
  777 +
  778 +% Can be used to pull up biographies so that the bottom of the last one
  779 +% is flush with the other column.
  780 +%\enlargethispage{-5in}
  781 +
  782 +
  783 +
  784 +% that's all folks
  785 +\end{document}
  786 +
  787 +
... ...
changelog.txt 0 → 100644
  1 +++ a/changelog.txt
  1 +
  2 +
  3 + Changelog history of the IEEEtran LaTeX class.
  4 + 2015/08/26
  5 + by Michael Shell (MDS)
  6 + http://www.michaelshell.org/
  7 +
  8 +
  9 + 2015/08/26 V1.8b (MDS) changes:
  10 +
  11 + 1) Added new comsoc mode for the IEEE Communications Society.
  12 + This mode (at present) only invokes the use of the newtxmath math fonts.
  13 +
  14 + 2) Revised IEEEeqnarray column specifications to work with active "
  15 + (or other punctuation catcode changes) as with babel under the
  16 + german or ngerman language modes.
  17 + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem.
  18 +
  19 + 3) Added \indexspace and other index related macros as newer versions of
  20 + article.cls now do. These macros are needed to avoid an error when
  21 + using the glossaries package.
  22 + Thanks to Sebastian Nyberg for suggesting this change.
  23 +
  24 + 4) Fixed odd/even page header font bug under compsoc mode and
  25 + other page style code improvements.
  26 + Thanks to Marco Paolieri for reporting this problem.
  27 +
  28 + 5) Added hooks to allow for easy control of spacing above title.
  29 +
  30 + 6) Added the \IEEEnoauxwrite command.
  31 + Thanks to Sudarshan Mukherjee for suggesting this feature.
  32 +
  33 +
  34 + 2014/09/17 V1.8a (MDS) changes:
  35 +
  36 + 1) Extensive rework of the compsoc mode to comply with the latest standards
  37 + of the IEEE Computer Society.
  38 +
  39 + 2) Internal code improvements for page setup and command argument
  40 + processing.
  41 +
  42 + 3) Fixed abstract, index terms and diamond line for compsoc technotes.
  43 + Thanks to Dimitris Schinianakis for reporting this problem.
  44 +
  45 + 4) New cspaper option to support the special trim paper size
  46 + (7.875in x 10.75in) used in actual Computer Society journals. For
  47 + compsoc journal mode, typesetting will not be altered by the use of this
  48 + option.
  49 +
  50 + 5) New \IEEEraisesectionheading{} command to provide for the special raised
  51 + first section heading of Computer Society journal papers.
  52 +
  53 + 6) Increased \clubpenalty, \widowpenalty, \displaywidowpenalty to
  54 + discourage paragraph breaks at the first and last lines.
  55 + Thanks to Dirk Beyer for suggesting this change.
  56 +
  57 + 7) Added lines per column console message.
  58 +
  59 +
  60 +*******
  61 + 2012/12/27 V1.8 (MDS) changes::
  62 +
  63 + 1) New transmag class option to support the IEEE Transactions on Magnetics
  64 + format. Thanks to Wei Yingkang, Sangmin Suh and Benjamin Gaussens
  65 + for suggestions and beta testing.
  66 +
  67 + 2) The \IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext and
  68 + \IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext
  69 + commands have been deprecated in favor of their
  70 + \IEEEtitleabstractindextext and \IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext
  71 + (observe that the "not" has changed to "non") equivalents. This change
  72 + generalizes and decouples them from compsoc mode because the new
  73 + transmag mode also uses them now.
  74 +
  75 + 3) Added new *-forms of \IEEEyesnumber*, \IEEEnonumber*, \IEEEyessubnumber*,
  76 + and \IEEEnosubnumber* (the non-star form of the latter is also new) which
  77 + persist across IEEEeqnarray lines until countermanded. To provide for
  78 + continued subequations across instances of IEEEeqnarrays as well as for
  79 + subequations that follow a main equation (e.g., 14, 14a, 14b ...)
  80 + \IEEEyessubnumber no longer automatically increments the equation number
  81 + on it's first invocation of a subequation group. Invoke both
  82 + \IEEEyesnumber\IEEEyessubnumber together to start a new
  83 + equation/subequation group.
  84 +
  85 + 4) Hyperref links now work with IEEEeqnarray equations.
  86 + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser for reporting this problem.
  87 +
  88 + 5) Fixed \markboth so that it does not cause an error with babel.sty.
  89 + Thanks to Frank Meier for suggesting this change.
  90 +
  91 + 6) Change all instances of ~ to \nobreakspace to avoid
  92 +
  93 + ! Argument of \language@active@arg~ has an extra }
  94 +
  95 + figure caption error with bable.sty under spanish. Thanks to
  96 + Manuel Olivares and Javier Bezos for suggesting this change.
  97 +
  98 + 7) Allow line breaks within long theorem names.
  99 + Thanks to Miquel Payaro for suggesting this change.
  100 +
  101 + 8) Revised \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{} to allow inner alignments without
  102 + requiring extra containing braces to prevent an incomplete \ifx error.
  103 + Thanks to Stefan M. Moser and Auke van der Valk for reporting this
  104 + problem.
  105 +
  106 + 9) Revised spacing at top of top figures and tables to better
  107 + align with the top main text lines as IEEE does in its journals.
  108 + Thanks to Dirk Beyer for reporting this issue and beta testing.
  109 +
  110 +10) Removed support for legacy IED list commands, legacy QED and proof
  111 + commands and the legacy biography and biographynophoto environments.
  112 + IEEEtran no longer defines or references \labelindent so as to
  113 + avoid namespace problems with list packages that define it.
  114 + Thanks to Sven Köhler for reporting the problem with enumitem.sty.
  115 +
  116 +
  117 +*******
  118 + 2007/03/05 V1.7a (MDS) changes:
  119 +
  120 + 1) Corrected problem of unwanted two column peer review title page format.
  121 + Thanks to Virgilio Rodriguez for reporting this bug.
  122 +
  123 + 2) "depreciated" -> "deprecated". Thanks to Virgilio Rodriguez for
  124 + suggesting this change.
  125 +
  126 +
  127 +
  128 +*******
  129 + 2007/01/11 V1.7 (MDS) changes:
  130 +
  131 + 1) New class option compsoc to support the IEEE Computer Society format.
  132 +
  133 + 2) New class option captionsoff disables the display of figure/table
  134 + captions. endfloat.sty is now mentioned in the docs. Thanks to Geoff
  135 + Walker for suggesting these changes.
  136 +
  137 + 3) Fixed compatibility issues with subfig.sty and caption.sty. Thanks to
  138 + Steven Douglas Cochran and Axel Sommerfeldt for suggesting this change.
  139 +
  140 + 4) New \CLASSINPUT, \CLASSOPTION and \CLASSINFO interface allows for more
  141 + user control and conditional compilation.
  142 +
  143 + 5) \ifcenterfigcaptions (\centerfigcaptionstrue, \centerfigcaptionsfalse),
  144 + \CMPARstart and \overrideIEEEmargins have been removed and no are
  145 + longer supported. The effect of \overrideIEEEmargins can be mimicked
  146 + via the more general \CLASSINPUT interface:
  147 + % US letter paper:
  148 + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{0.775in}
  149 + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{0.585in}
  150 + % A4 paper:
  151 + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{17mm}
  152 + \newcommand{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}{11.647mm}
  153 +
  154 + 6) Several commands and environments have been deprecated in favor of
  155 + replacements with IEEE prefixes to better avoid potential future name
  156 + clashes with other packages. Legacy code retained to allow the use of
  157 + the obsolete forms (for now), but with a warning message to the console
  158 + during compilation:
  159 + \IEEEauthorblockA, \IEEEauthorblockN, \IEEEauthorrefmark,
  160 + \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEkeywords, \IEEEPARstart,
  161 + \IEEEproof, \IEEEpubid, \IEEEpubidadjcol, \IEEEQED, \IEEEQEDclosed,
  162 + \IEEEQEDopen, \IEEEspecialpapernotice. IEEEtran.cls now redefines
  163 + \proof in way to avoid problems with the amsthm.sty package.
  164 + For IED lists:
  165 + \IEEEiedlabeljustifyc, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyl, \IEEEiedlabeljustifyr,
  166 + \IEEEnocalcleftmargin, \IEEElabelindent, \IEEEsetlabelwidth,
  167 + \IEEEusemathlabelsep
  168 +
  169 + 7) These commands/lengths now require the IEEE prefix and do not have
  170 + legacy support: \IEEEnormaljot.
  171 + For IED lists: \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin, \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor,
  172 + \IEEEiedlistdecl, \IEEElabelindentfactor
  173 +
  174 + 8) \normalsizebaselineskip skip replaced by
  175 + \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (nonrubber dimen) length.
  176 + Also, new \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (nonrubber dimen)
  177 + provided.
  178 +
  179 + 9) Now defaults to using Alpha numbering rather than Roman for appendices
  180 + numbering. This is because Alpha numbering is more common and avoids
  181 + problems with theorem numbering. \ifuseRomanappendices
  182 + (\useRomanappendicestrue, \useRomanappendicesfalse) is no longer
  183 + supported. Instead, use the new class option romanappendices if Roman
  184 + appendices numbering is desired. Thanks to Leonid Mirkin for reporting
  185 + the problem with theorems in appendices and suggesting changes.
  186 +
  187 +10) Improved paper size setting code for pdflatex.
  188 +
  189 +11) Better handling of theorem numbering when using the section counter
  190 + within the appendix(cies). Thanks to Leonid Mirkin for suggesting
  191 + this change.
  192 +
  193 +12) Fixed bug that caused equations at the end of theorems to be too
  194 + close to the line below them.
  195 +
  196 +13) Provided hook to conference mode console notice and changed notice to
  197 + better support conferences that use A4 paper. Thanks to Volker Kuhlmann
  198 + for suggesting this change.
  199 +
  200 +14) \IEEEauthorrefmark made robust to allow it to be used in \thanks
  201 + without a leading \protect
  202 +
  203 +15) Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
  204 + OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
  205 + available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
  206 +
  207 +16) Revised internal \@sect command to be more robust for users who employ
  208 + modified section heading formats. Thanks to Zarko F. Cucej for
  209 + suggesting this change.
  210 +
  211 +17) Improved \thesubsubsection definition to prevent breaks at the hyphen.
  212 + Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change. Thanks to
  213 + Dan Luecking and Heiko Oberdiek for explaining some of the various
  214 + alternatives and techniques to fix it.
  215 +
  216 +18) No longer provide \NAT@parse hack to get cite.sty to play (somewhat)
  217 + with hyperref.sty as this is already included in cite.sty version
  218 + 4.0 (2003-05-27) and later.
  219 +
  220 +19) At the beginning of document, set the default style of url.sty to be
  221 + the same as the current text font - as is done in IEEE journals.
  222 +
  223 +20) Corrected excessive line spacing in journal table captions. Thanks to
  224 + Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change.
  225 +
  226 +21) Corrected \thesubsubsection to use the "I-A1" format IEEE uses rather
  227 + than "I-A.1" as was done before. Ditto for \theparagraph. Thanks to
  228 + Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change.
  229 +
  230 +22) Enclose papersize specials within \AtBeginDvi in case someone wants
  231 + to make a format with IEEEtran. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for
  232 + suggesting this change.
  233 +
  234 +23) Eliminated the small space after abstract and keywords dash as IEEE
  235 + now does. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting this change.
  236 +
  237 +24) IEEEkeywords is no longer locked out in conference mode
  238 +
  239 +25) Increase defaults of \binoppenalty and \relpenalty to discourage
  240 + breaks within equations. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann for suggesting
  241 + this change.
  242 +
  243 +26) Support optional argument for IEEEproof. Thanks to Ingo Steinwart for
  244 + suggesting this change. Also, start a new \par with \IEEEproof.
  245 +
  246 +27) Add support for an optional argument to \bstctlcite.
  247 +
  248 +28) Changed \topfraction and \dbltopfraction from 1.0 to 0.9. Thanks to
  249 + Donald Arseneau for suggesting this change.
  250 +
  251 +
  252 +*******
  253 + 2005/09/13 V1.6c (MDS) changes:
  254 +
  255 + 1) Changed endfigure/endfloat definitions so as not to cause problems with
  256 + preview-LaTeX and other packages. Thanks to Stephan Heuel and David
  257 + Kastrup for reporting this problem.
  258 +
  259 +
  260 +
  261 +*******
  262 + 2002/11/18 V1.6b (MDS) changes:
  263 +
  264 + 1) Fixed problem with figure captions when using hyperref. Thanks to
  265 + Leandro Barajas and Michael Bassetti for reporting this bug.
  266 +
  267 + 2) Provide a fake nabib command \NAT@parse so that hyperref will not
  268 + interfere with the operation of cite.sty. However, as a result citation
  269 + numbers will not be hyperlinked. Also, natbib will not be able to work
  270 + with IEEEtran. However, this is perhaps the best solution until
  271 + cite.sty and hyperref.sty are able to co-exist with each other.
  272 + It easy enough to override the fake command via:
  273 + \makeatletter
  274 + \let\NAT@parse\undefined
  275 + \makeatother
  276 +
  277 + 3) Revised font selection method so as not to have problems when used
  278 + with setspace.sty. Thanks to Zhang Yan for reporting this bug.
  279 +
  280 + 4) Added \special to feed papersize to dvips. Thanks to Moritz Borgmann
  281 + for suggesting this feature.
  282 +
  283 + 5) In addition to the IEEE IED lists, the original IED style list
  284 + environments (as is done in article.cls) are now provided as
  285 + LaTeXitemize, LaTeXenumerate, and LaTeXdescription. Also, users can
  286 + now redefine \makelabel within IEEE IED list controls. There may be
  287 + some use for this in specialized applications. Thanks to Eli Barzilay
  288 + for suggesting this feature.
  289 +
  290 + 6) \table* now defaults to \footnotesize text like \table.
  291 +
  292 + 7) The draft modes now no longer force a pagebreak after the title.
  293 + Thanks to Christian Peel for suggesting this change.
  294 +
  295 + 8) New draftclsnofoot mode is like draftcls, but does not display the
  296 + date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot of the page. Thanks to
  297 + Christian Peel for suggesting this feature.
  298 +
  299 + 9) New peerreview and peerreviewca modes with \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle
  300 + command allows for a "cover" titlepage for anonymous peer review.
  301 + Except for the cover titlepage, peerreview is much like journal mode.
  302 + peerreviewca is like peerreview, but allows the author names to be
  303 + entered and formatted as under conference mode so that author
  304 + affiliations and contact information can be easily seen on the cover
  305 + page. Thanks to Eric Benedict for suggesting this feature.
  306 +
  307 +
  308 +
  309 +*******
  310 + 2002/08/13 V1.6 (MDS) changes:
  311 +
  312 + 1) Added conference mode via conference option. Defaults to the
  313 + traditional journal mode. e.g., \documentclass[conference]{IEEEtran}
  314 +
  315 + 2) Added support for A4 paper via new a4paper option. Pdflatex's paper
  316 + size lengths are now automatically set to the proper paper size being
  317 + used.
  318 +
  319 + 3) Revised margins again. Page text is now horizontally centered.
  320 + Conference mode increases the top and bottom margins with the bottom
  321 + margin being slightly larger. For A4 paper, the top margin and text
  322 + typesetting will not change from those of US letter paper, but the side
  323 + margins will be smaller and the bottom margin will be larger than that
  324 + of US letter. All per IEEE specs.
  325 +
  326 + 4) Fixed footnote line spacing anomaly in draft mode.
  327 + Thanks to Alberto Rodriguez for reporting this bug.
  328 +
  329 + Also, slightly revised footnote and \thanks note spacing.
  330 + Set \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 to prevent LaTeX
  331 + from breaking footnotes across multiple pages or columns.
  332 +
  333 + 5) Fixed bug that caused overwritten photo areas and sometimes anomalous
  334 + spacing when a new paragraph was started within a biography. Also,
  335 + the presence of \par's, new lines or spaces at the beginning of
  336 + abstract, keywords, biography, or biographynophoto will no longer
  337 + affect the first word spacing.
  338 + Thanks to Eric Durant for reporting this bug.
  339 +
  340 + The biography environment now does a better job in preventing
  341 + a biography photo area from being broken across pages or columns.
  342 +
  343 + 6) Fixed whitespace between \cite entries bug. i.e.,
  344 + both \cite{einstein24, knuth84} and \cite{einstein24,knuth84}
  345 + are now valid. \cite is now a robust command as it should be.
  346 + IEEEtran now no longer defines the old non-standard \shortcite or
  347 + \citename.
  348 +
  349 + The base IEEEtran.cls does not sort citation numbers or produce ranges
  350 + for three or more consecutive numbers. However, V1.6 of IEEEtran.cls
  351 + now pre-defines the following format control macros to facilitate easy
  352 + use with Donald Arseneau's cite.sty package (tested with cite.sty V3.9):
  353 +
  354 + \def\citepunct{], [}
  355 + \def\citedash{]--[}
  356 +
  357 + cite.sty is standard on most LaTeX sytems and can be obtained from
  358 + www.ctan.org. Thanks to Donald Arseneau for creating cite.sty,
  359 + providing the required format arguments to produce the IEEE style
  360 + and designing a cite interface capable of handling the IEEE citation
  361 + style.
  362 +
  363 + Note: Historically, IEEE has wanted authors to "hardcode" symbolics.
  364 + (i.e., replace all \cite{} with fixed [x]). However, it now seems that
  365 + most electronic manuscript submissions to IEEE are in .pdf format, and
  366 + as such, do not require the LaTeX document reference numbers to be hard
  367 + coded. If an author is required to submit actual LaTeX files, I do
  368 + recommend that the bibliography file (.bbl) be copied into the .tex
  369 + document and the \bibliographystyle{} and \bibliography{} commands be
  370 + commented out so that the .tex file does not depend on (potentially
  371 + lengthy and/or confidential) external bibliography database files
  372 +
  373 + 7) Adjusted some spacing parameters. The spacing above and below equations
  374 + has been revised (to a typical IEEE value). \jot now has a decent value.
  375 + The title text is now exactly 24pt. (On a related note, \fontsubfuzz has
  376 + been increased to 0.9pt to prevent annoying font substitution warnings
  377 + when using the Computer Modern fonts that use the 24.88pt size.)
  378 + In V1.6, \small is now 8.5pt in 9pt docs because \footnotesize is 8pt.
  379 + For 9pt docs, you should probably go ahead and use \footnotesize when
  380 + you need text a little smaller than \normalsize.
  381 + The interword spacing has been adjusted to be extremely close to that
  382 + which IEEE uses. You can use a new class option, nofonttune, if you need
  383 + to disable the adjusting of the interword spacing. This adjustment and
  384 + an increase to \hyphenpenalty have greatly reduced the amount of
  385 + hyphenation in a typical paper.
  386 + The baselineskip for the normalsize fonts has been tweaked to reduce
  387 + underfull vboxes on journal paper columns with only paragraphs.
  388 + Conference mode does the same thing but by also tweaking the \textheight
  389 + slightly off 9.25in (IEEE spec) to ensure an integer number of lines per
  390 + page. Draft (also draftcls) mode has also been revised to reduce
  391 + underfull vbox warnings. However, draft mode can still produce underfull
  392 + vboxes (a direct result of the increase in line spacing and margins) if:
  393 + A non-normalsize font occupies an entire column (abstract and index
  394 + terms take up a whole column by themselves); or the beginning of a
  395 + section occurs near the end of a column and cannot be squeezed into the
  396 + bottom, etc. This is normal as draft mode's liberal spacings cannot
  397 + guarantee perfect formatting.
  398 +
  399 + 8) New biographynophoto environment for biographies without photos.
  400 + Usage:
  401 +
  402 + \begin{biographynophoto}{author name}
  403 + biography text here
  404 + \end{biographynophoto}
  405 +
  406 + 9) Fixed bug that produced multiple table of contents entries for papers
  407 + with more than one biography. Also, biography now works better with
  408 + hyperref.
  409 +
  410 +10) New \sublargesize font size command provides for 11pt text in a 10pt
  411 + document. (Needed for things like author names.) For documents not
  412 + using 10pt normal size text, \sublargesize is currently identical
  413 + to \large.
  414 +
  415 +11) New \IEEEmembership command to provide correct font to indicate IEEE
  416 + membership for journal papers.
  417 +
  418 +12) Fixed author name line overflow problem when in journal mode. This
  419 + problem had been introduced in V1.5 in my rush to get \and to work for
  420 + conferences. \and is unneeded (and invalid) in journal mode. For
  421 + conference mode, \and will work as expected and features an optional
  422 + spacing argument. i.e., \and[\hspace{5ex}]
  423 + \and will default (recommended) to using \hfill which will result in
  424 + equal spacing between author blocks.
  425 +
  426 +13) New \authorblockN, \authorblockA and \authorrefmark commands to
  427 + facilitate easy formatting of author names, affiliations and cross
  428 + reference symbols, respectively, when in conference mode. These
  429 + three commands are to be used only for conference papers.
  430 + In conference mode, \author text is placed within a modified tabular
  431 + environment (somewhat like article.cls). So, within \author in
  432 + conference mode, you should not try to enclose multiple \\ within an
  433 + environment or command (other than the argument braces of
  434 + \authorblockX{}). For example:
  435 +
  436 + \author{\authorblockN{{John Doe \\ Jane Doe}}} % WRONG!
  437 +
  438 + will generate an error.
  439 +
  440 + Note that font size/attribute changes will now persists across \\
  441 + within \author. (But, not across author blocks nor across \and.)
  442 + However, with the new commands, there should be no need to alter any
  443 + font attributes within \author. All text sizing and spacing within
  444 + \author{} and the author block commands is per IEEE specs for both
  445 + conference and journal modes. (In conference mode, the author names
  446 + are only very slightly larger than the affiliations which are in normal
  447 + size.) For specialized applications you can alter the justification of
  448 + author lines by placing \hfill at the beginning or at the end of a line.
  449 + The interline spacing within \author is determined by the font
  450 + attributes that are in effect at the end of each line within author.
  451 +
  452 +14) Because the titles and author name blocks use different font
  453 + sizes/styles from the main text, it was possible that two column papers
  454 + with titles that span both columns (standard journal and conference
  455 + papers, but not technotes) with certain numbers of lines for the title
  456 + and authors' name/affiliations can cause underfull vbox problems
  457 + (paragraphs with large spacings between them) in the second column of
  458 + the main text on the title page - if there were no new sections,
  459 + equations or figures in this column (they would provide some needed
  460 + rubber spacing). The use of things like special paper notices and
  461 + publisher ID marks also affected this issue. The problem could not
  462 + happen in the first column because the first column has a rubber length
  463 + around the heading of the first section. Furthermore, problems seldom
  464 + occurred on pages after the first as the margins had been chosen not to
  465 + cause it with the popular font sizes. Rubber lengths after the author
  466 + names would not fix this problem.
  467 + Auto-calculating a "good" spacing after the title is a tad difficult
  468 + to do in LaTeX. However, I am pleased to report that V1.6 has this new
  469 + capability - "dynamically determined title spacing". IEEEtran will now
  470 + measure the height of all the title and author text in \maketitle
  471 + and then calculate a rigid (non-rubber) spacer to follow that meets
  472 + IEEE specs and also produces a \textheight on the title page that
  473 + ensures an integer number of normalsized lines on the rest of the page.
  474 + Single column papers, and two column papers with the title entirely in
  475 + column one (technotes) do not need dynamic rigid spacing and therefore
  476 + use standard rubber spacers.
  477 +
  478 + Note: This problem can still crop up if you use floats that span both
  479 + columns (i.e., figure*). It has been a decade+ long limitation with
  480 + LaTeX that the stretchable portion of \dbltextfloatsep is ignored.
  481 + If you get a problem with underful vbox warnings and paragraphs that
  482 + "are pulled apart" on page with a float that spans both columns, tweak
  483 + the space between the figure and the main text a little:
  484 +
  485 + \vskip 5pt
  486 + \end{figure*}
  487 +
  488 + If you can't find a value that fixes both columns, you are going to
  489 + have to put a rubber spacer somewhere in one or both of the columns.
  490 +15) Because of change #14 above, those of you using \pubid will, as of V1.6,
  491 + have to place it *before* \maketitle in order for it have the intended
  492 + affect. The dynamic spacer algorithm must see if you are using \pubid
  493 + when \maketitle is called. \pubidadjcol works as before except that it
  494 + now has additional logic to prevent it from doing anything if \pubid
  495 + was never called.
  496 +
  497 +16) In some unusual, non-standard circumstances, an author may desire to
  498 + alter the spacing after the title area or put some unusual text above
  499 + the main text. For instance, to stop a bad break when a new section
  500 + occurs right at the start of the second page. This is difficult to do
  501 + when the title spans both columns of two column text since LaTeX treats
  502 + such title text as a type of float. A new command,
  503 + \IEEEaftertitletext{}, gives access to the end of that produced by
  504 + \maketitle. The types of things that can go into \IEEEaftertitletext
  505 + are the same as those into \twocolumn[] - no \par, but \\ are OK. There
  506 + is no restriction on the range of spacings that can be used. e.g.,
  507 + \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-100pt}} will push the main text well into
  508 + the title and \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{100pt}} will push it far down
  509 + the page. You will have complete control. If used, place
  510 + \IEEEaftertitletext{} before \maketitle like \title and \author.
  511 + IEEEtran's dynamic title spacing intentionally does not take into
  512 + consideration the contents of \IEEEaftertitletext{} when determining
  513 + the spacer after the title area (otherwise it would try to second
  514 + guess you), so the user will have manually adjust the height of the
  515 + contents in \IEEEaftertitletext{} if the problem discussed in #14 above
  516 + should develop. A safe bet is to keep the height of contents of
  517 + \IEEEaftertitletext{} to integer multiples of \baselineskip, e.g.,
  518 + \IEEEaftertitletext{\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}
  519 +
  520 + Because it can result in an IEEE nonstandard format, the use of
  521 + \IEEEaftertitletext{} is discouraged. Possible uses include (1) the use
  522 + of IEEEtran for non-IEEE work with different title spacing requirements,
  523 + or (2) as an emergency manual override if a problem should develop in
  524 + IEEEtran's automatic spacing algorithm.
  525 +
  526 +17) completely rewritten \PARstart to:
  527 + a. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
  528 + within the paragraph that uses \PARstart.
  529 + b. auto-detect and use the current font family
  530 + c. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
  531 + interword glue will now work as normal.
  532 + d. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
  533 +
  534 + Because the current font family is now auto-detected, there is no
  535 + longer any need for \CMPARstart - it is now the same as \PARstart.
  536 +
  537 +18) There is now a new "open box" Q.E.D. symbol (\QEDopen) as well as the
  538 + original default (\QED) closed one (\QEDclosed). Some journals use
  539 + the open form. To make \proof use the open form, just do:
  540 + \renewcommand{\QED}{\QEDopen}
  541 +
  542 +19) Additional \typeout{} notices added to warn the user when unusual
  543 + settings/commands are detected or as reminders to avoid common errors
  544 + when in conference mode.
  545 +
  546 +20) IEEEtran now provides \abovecaptionskip and \belowcaptionskip skip
  547 + registers because article class provides them and some packages
  548 + may error if they are missing. However, IEEEtran only uses
  549 + \abovecaptionskip for actual caption spacing.
  550 +
  551 +21) Fixed bug that prevented users from redefining the section headings
  552 + to use arabic digits. Thanks to Richardt H. Wilkinson for reporting
  553 + this bug.
  554 +
  555 +22) Code cleaned up to be more efficient with the use of TeX registers;
  556 + removed some old LaTeX 2.09 code; revised option processing to
  557 + LaTeX2e standard; eliminated unwanted "phantom" spaces in some
  558 + environments.
  559 +
  560 +23) Added new \IEEEeqnarray, \IEEEeqnarraybox, \IEEEeqnarrayboxm and
  561 + \IEEEeqnarrayboxt environments to provide superior alternatives to the
  562 + standard LaTeX \eqnarray, \array and \tabular. Additional new support
  563 + commands include \IEEEeqnarraydecl, \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl,
  564 + \IEEEeqnarraymathstyle, \IEEEeqnarraytextstyle, \yesnumber.
  565 + \IEEEnonumber, \IEEEyesnumber, \IEEEyessubnumber, \IEEEeqnarraynumspace,
  566 + \IEEEeqnarraymulticol, \IEEEeqnarrayomit, \IEEEeqnarraydefcol,
  567 + \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep, \IEEEeqnarrayseprow, \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut,
  568 + \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow, \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut,
  569 + \IEEEeqnarraystrutmode, \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize,
  570 + \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd, \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue,
  571 + \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse and \IEEEstrut.
  572 + These are documented in the user's guide.
  573 +
  574 +24) V1.6 changed back to using () around theorem names (which are also now
  575 + in italics) as this is what IEEE is using now. Thanks to Christian Peel
  576 + for reporting this. Also, when section numbers are used as the first
  577 + part of theorem numbers, display them in arabic, not Roman.
  578 +
  579 +25) New \IEEEtriggeratref{X} command allows a page break to be triggered
  580 + just before the given reference number "X". This is most useful when
  581 + balancing the columns on the last page and a \newpage between references
  582 + is desired. \IEEEtriggercmd{X} allows a different command to be executed
  583 + at trigger.
  584 +
  585 +
  586 +
  587 +*******
  588 + 2001/07/26 V1.5 (MDS) changes:
  589 +
  590 +
  591 + 1) Fixed \and within \author bug: (! Misplaced \crcr. \endtabular ->\crcr)
  592 + Thanks to Rainer Dorsch for discovering and reporting that \and
  593 + did not work.
  594 +
  595 + 2) Fixed the biography environment so that if a biography's text is shorter
  596 + than the area allocated for the photo, a collision with the next
  597 + biography does not occur. You can now put real graphics (using the
  598 + graphicx package) into the biography photo box with a new optional
  599 + argument of the biography command! For example:
  600 +
  601 + \begin{biography}[{\includegraphics[width=1in,height=1.25in,clip,
  602 + keepaspectratio]{./tux.eps}}]{Linux Penguin}
  603 +
  604 + will use the specified graphic as the author's photo. The photo area is
  605 + exactly 1in wide by 1.25in high - as is done in IEEE Transactions. Try
  606 + to keep the same 4:5 aspect ratio if scanning/cropping your photos.
  607 + Note the need for the extra set of enclosing braces around the
  608 + \includegraphics. Without it, The LaTeX parser may get confused when it
  609 + sees the \includegraphics's brackets within the biography's optional
  610 + argument. Due to the length of the \includegraphics command, you may
  611 + wish to define your own shorthand form of it. I have not done so with
  612 + IEEEtran to prevent dependence on the graphicx package. If you do not
  613 + use the optional argument, or leave it empty, a standard frame box
  614 + with the words "Place Photo Here" will be used. If you want the space
  615 + to remain completely empty, you can do:
  616 +
  617 + \begin{biography}[\mbox{}]{The Invisible Man}
  618 +
  619 + The interface to biography's optional argument is into a
  620 + 1in X 1.25in minipage in which the argument text is centered both
  621 + horizontally and vertically:
  622 +
  623 + \begin{minipage}[b][1.25in][c]{1in}%
  624 + \centering
  625 + #1%
  626 + \end{minipage}
  627 +
  628 + Within the biography environment, \unitlength is set to 1in.
  629 + With this in mind, you can even design your own custom frameboxes.
  630 + For instance:
  631 +
  632 + \begin{biography}[\framebox(1,1.25){\parbox[][\height
  633 + ][c]{0.9in}{\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\
  634 + HERE}}]{Author Name}
  635 +
  636 + will yield the same type of result as the default photo box.
  637 +
  638 + Thanks to Herbert Voss for discovering the collision bug, suggesting
  639 + the ability to handle graphics and providing some prototype code.
  640 +
  641 +
  642 +
  643 +*******
  644 + 2001/03/15 V1.4 (MDS) changes:
  645 +
  646 +
  647 + 1) New "draftcls" and "final" options have been added.
  648 + Thanks to Dragan Cvetkovic for suggesting an option like draftcls.
  649 +
  650 + 2) Documentation changes to reflect the fact that this IEEEtran.cls
  651 + is no longer beta test.
  652 +
  653 + 3) Slightly revised caption sizes. Figure and table captions are now
  654 + in \footnotesize, not \small as before.
  655 +
  656 + 4) Allow user to control figure caption justification. IEEEtran.cls
  657 + normally defaults to left justified as is done in Transactions.
  658 + However, for conferences, you may wish to issue the command:
  659 + \centerfigcaptionstrue
  660 + in the preamble. Short (less than one line long) figure captions
  661 + will then be centered. Multi-line figure captions will always be
  662 + properly left justified. V1.6: This is already done for you when
  663 + using the conference mode.
  664 +
  665 +
  666 +
  667 +*******
  668 + 2001/01/18 V1.3
  669 + Michael Shell (MDS) made extensive changes and additions:
  670 +
  671 +
  672 + BUGS FIXED (and many others too numerous to mention!):
  673 + 1) Fixed improper alignment with itemized, enumerated and
  674 + description lists. Added new controls to these three
  675 + environments so that it is easy to get the alignment IEEE
  676 + uses. Furthermore, the itemize, enumerate and description lists
  677 + no longer force a new paragraph to begin at the end the list
  678 + (\par). (Sometimes lists are used within paragraphs.)
  679 +
  680 + 2) JVH's fixes now allow things like $\mathbf{N}(0,P(0))$
  681 + to work properly without needing the extra braces:
  682 + ${\mathbf{N}}(0,P(0))$. There is no longer any dependence
  683 + on the "rawfonts" and "oldlfont" packages. Thanks Juergen!
  684 +
  685 + 3) Fixed underfull hbox errors and incorrect reference number
  686 + alignment when the number of references in the bibliography
  687 + exceeded 9 entries (which is almost every paper!).
  688 +
  689 + 4) Removed dependence on the LaTeX sizexx.clo files.
  690 + Now, 9pt documents should work correctly even on systems that
  691 + lack a size9.clo file. This is most often used in conjunction
  692 + with the option "technote" for "correspondence" papers like those
  693 + in IEEE Transactions on Information Theory. For virtually all
  694 + other papers, 10pt is used and so it is the default.
  695 + Some improper font sizes have been corrected. \footnotesize is
  696 + now 8pt in 9pt docs, so footnotes in technotes should be the
  697 + correct size now.
  698 +
  699 + 5) Added \interlinepenalty within the bibliography section to discourage
  700 + LaTeX from breaking within a reference. IEEE almost never breaks within
  701 + a reference and when they do it is usually in technotes
  702 + (correspondence papers). You may get an underfull vbox warning in the
  703 + bibliography indicating that the spacing just before the "REFERENCES"
  704 + section is larger than normal, but the final result will be more like
  705 + what IEEE will publish. See the comments in the BIBLIOGRAPHY section
  706 + around line 2034 below if you want to change this behavior.
  707 +
  708 + 6) No longer "blows up" when you use \paragraph and have a table
  709 + of contents.
  710 +
  711 + 7) Theorem environment changed, (but for V1.6, back to the old way, sigh).
  712 +
  713 + 8) Figure captions adjusted: IEEE left (not center) justifies
  714 + figure captions (for journals) and does not indent figure caption text.
  715 +
  716 + 9) Adjusted some spacings in the table of contents(TOC))/list-of-figures/
  717 + list-of-tables so that section/table numbers will not so easily
  718 + collide with the titles. Section VIII was usually the worst offender.
  719 + Still doesn't right justify the section numbers, but neither does
  720 + article.cls (This must be why LaTeX likes the x.y.z section numbering
  721 + scheme unlike I, II, III, etc. of IEEE. )
  722 + It may be "normal" as it is (left justified). sigh.
  723 +
  724 +10) Now uses "index terms" now as a heading instead of "keywords".
  725 + Furthermore, the "index terms" and "abstract" headings are in bold
  726 + italic. This is how IEEE does things.
  727 +
  728 +11) \thebibliography and \biography now put entries into
  729 + the table of contents for you.
  730 +
  731 +
  732 +*******
  733 +
  734 +
  735 +
  736 +
  737 + *******
  738 + 2000/09/06 (JVH) changes: (now designated as V1.2)
  739 +
  740 + made some corrections to get closer to LaTeX2e
  741 + 20000906 Juergen v.Hagen
  742 + vonhagen@ihefiji.etec.uni-karlsruhe.de
  743 +
  744 + Permission to redistribute granted as of December 2000.
  745 + *******
  746 +
  747 +
  748 +
  749 +
  750 +
  751 + *******
  752 +
  753 + 1996 (JWD) LaTeX2e version: (now designated as V1.1)
  754 +
  755 + In the most recent TeXhax digest, there was a request for a copy of
  756 + IEEEtrans.sty modified to work with LaTeX2e. I have a version I
  757 + modified to make it IEEEtrans.cls, which I have sent to the person
  758 + making the request and am now sending to you to consider posting to
  759 + the archives.
  760 + --
  761 + Jon Dixon
  762 + dixonj@colorado.edu
  763 + http://spot.colorado.edu/~dixonj/
  764 +
  765 +*******
  766 +
  767 +
  768 +
  769 +
  770 +
  771 +*******
  772 +
  773 + 30-August-1993 original LaTeX 2.09 version (IEEEtran.sty),
  774 + (now designated as V1.0):
  775 +
  776 + by Gerry Murray and Silvano Balemi
  777 + Automatic Control Lab, ETH Zurich, Switzerland
  778 + balemi@aut.ee.ethz.ch
  779 +
  780 +*******
  781 +
  782 +
  783 +
... ...